21p9014

21p9014
®
xSeries 240
User’s Reference
Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information in Appendix B,
“Product warranties and notices” on page 179.
First Edition (October 2000)
 Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2000. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to
restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents
Safety information statements
Lithium battery notice . . . . .
Laser compliance statements .
About this book . . . . .
How this book is organized
Notices used in this book
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM xSeries 240
Features and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
What your server offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reliability, availability, and serviceability features
Controls and indicators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator information panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input/output connectors and expansion slots . .
Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2. Arranging your workspace
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comfort
Glare and lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .
Electrical outlets and cable lengths
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
. . . . .
Configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Configuration/Setup Utility program . . . . .
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
Configuring options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving configuration conflicts . . . . . . . . .
Using the SCSISelect utility program
. . . . . .
Configuring the Ethernet controller . . . . . . . .
Failover for redundant Ethernet . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4. Installing options . . . . .
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working inside the server with power on
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . .
System reliability considerations . . . .
Preparing to install options . . . . . . .
Working with adapters . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a microprocessor kit
. . . . .
Installing memory-module kits
. . . . .
Installing internal drives . . . . . . . . .
Installing a hot-swap power supply . . .
Removing a hot-swap power supply . .
Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly . .
Completing the installation
. . . . . . .
Connecting external options . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v
vii
viii
ix
ix
x
1
2
4
6
7
10
11
13
17
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
21
30
30
32
35
35
41
41
42
44
44
45
46
53
62
65
67
79
81
83
85
90
iii
Chapter 5. System board and processor board
System-board component locations . . . . . . . .
System-board jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor-board component locations . . . . . . .
Processor-board jumper and switches . . . . . . .
Changing jumper positions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 6. Solving problems
. . .
Diagnostic tools overview . . . . . . .
Diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . .
Power-on self-test (POST) messages
Power-on self test (POST) beep codes
Recovering BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic error message tables . . .
Ethernet controller messages . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving configuration conflicts . . .
Identifying problems using status LEDs
. . . . . . . . .
Replacing the battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 7. Getting help, service, and information
Service support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you call for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting customer support and service . . . . . . . . .
Purchasing additional services . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering publications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix A. Installing a server in a rack enclosure
iv
IBM xSeries User's Reference
107
107
110
112
122
124
125
136
143
151
151
157
161
162
163
163
166
169
. . . . . . . . . . . .
171
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
179
188
191
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
Appendix B. Product warranties and notices
Warranty Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index
99
99
100
101
102
103
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety information statements
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.
Před instalací tohoto produktu si přečtěte příručku bezpečnostních instrukcí.
Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.
Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.
Avant d'installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.
Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.
Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza
Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.
Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.
Pred inštaláciou tohto zariadenia si pečítaje Bezpečnostné predpisy.
Antes de instalar este producto lea la información de seguridad.
Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
v
1
DANGER
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication
cables is hazardous.
To avoid a shock hazard:
– Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform
installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product
during an electrical storm.
– Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded
electrical outlet.
– Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be
attached to this product.
– When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect
signal cables.
– Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire,
water, or structural damage.
– Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications
systems, networks, and modems before you open the
device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation
and configuration procedures.
– Connect and disconnect cables as described in the
following table when installing, moving, or opening covers
on this product or attached devices.
To Connect:
1. Turn everything OFF.
1. Turn everything OFF.
2. First, attach all cables to devices.
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet.
4. Remove all cables from devices.
5. Turn device ON.
vi
To Disconnect:
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Lithium battery notice
2
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354
or an equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If
your system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only
with the same module type made by the same manufacturer. The
battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled,
or disposed of.
Do not:
– Throw or immerse into water
– Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
– Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
Safety information statements
vii
Laser compliance statements
Some server models are equipped from the factory with a CD-ROM drive.
CD-ROM drives are also sold separately as options. The CD-ROM drive is a laser
product. The CD-ROM drive is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements
of the Department of Health and Human Services 21 Code of Federal Regulations
(DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products. Elsewhere, the drive is
certified to conform to the requirements of the International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) 825 and CENELEC EN 60 825 for Class 1 laser products.
3
CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic
devices, or transmitters) are installed, note the following:
– Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser
product could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation.
There are no serviceable parts inside the device.
– Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B
laser diode. Note the following.
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not
view directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure
to the beam.
viii
IBM xSeries User's Reference
About this book
This book provides instructions for installing and removing server options and
configuring and troubleshooting your server. It also provides information to help
you solve problems if they occur.
How this book is organized
Chapter 1, “Introducing the IBM xSeries 240,” describes the xSeries 240 server
and provides an overview of the server's features.
Chapter 2, “Arranging your workspace,” provides information on arranging your
equipment and workspace.
Chapter 3, “Configuring your server,” describes how to use the Configuration/Setup
Utility program to configure your server. This chapter also provides instructions for
using various utility programs.
Chapter 4, “Installing options,” contains instructions for installing and removing
options, such as memory, adapters, and internal drives. Instructions for connecting
external options are also included in this chapter.
Chapter 5, “System board and processor board,” contains information about the
system board and processor board component, switch, and jumper locations. This
chapter also provides the instructions needed to change the jumper settings.
Chapter 6, “Solving problems,” includes an overview of the diagnostic tools,
instructions for testing the server, lists of error messages, and troubleshooting
charts.
Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information,” provides the telephone number
and World Wide Web listings that you can use to obtain product updates, help, or
service.
Appendix A, “Installing a server in a rack enclosure,” contains information about
installing rack models of the xSeries 240.
Appendix B, “Product warranties and notices,” contains warranty and emission
notices. This chapter also contains trademarks and general-information notices.
An index follows the appendix.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
ix
Notices used in this book
This book contains information notices that relate to a specific topic. The Caution
and Danger notices also appear in the multilingual Safety Information book
provided on the IBM xSeries Documentation CD. Each notice is numbered for easy
reference to the corresponding notices in the multilingual book. The notice
definitions are as follows:
Notes
These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
Attention
These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or data. An
attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which
damage could occur.
Caution
These notices indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous to you. A
caution notice is placed just before a description of a potentially hazardous
procedure step or situation.
Danger
These notices indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or extremely
hazardous to you. A danger notice is placed just before a description of a
potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or situation.
x
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM xSeries 240
Your IBM
xSeries 240 is a high-performance, symmetric multiprocessing
(SMP) server. It is ideally suited for networking environments that require superior
microprocessor performance, efficient memory management, flexibility, and large
amounts of reliable data storage.
Performance, ease of use, reliability, and expansion capabilities were key
considerations during the design of your server. These design features make it
possible for you to customize the system hardware to meet your needs today, while
providing flexible expansion capabilities for the future.
Your server comes with a three-year limited warranty and IBM Server Start Up
Support. You can obtain up-to-date information about your xSeries 240 server and
other IBM server products at http://www.ibm.com/eserver/xseries on the World Wide
Web.
Your server serial number and model number are located on labels on the rear of
the server and on the front under the trim bezel. Write these numbers in the
spaces provided in your Installation Guide. You will need these numbers when you
register your server with IBM. After you register your server, you can receive
information about updates, performance tips, and compatibility. To register your
server, go to http://www.ibm.com/pc/register on the World Wide Web.
4
18 kg (37 lbs)
32 kg (70.5 lbs)
55 kg (121.2 lbs)
CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
1
Features and specifications
The following table summarizes the features of the xSeries 240 server.
Microprocessor
Intel Pentium III microprocessor
with MMX technology and SIMD
extensions
32 KB of level-1 cache
256 KB of level-2 cache (min.)
Expandable to two microprocessors
Memory
Standard: 128 MB (min), expandable
to 4 GB
133 MHz, registered, error correcting
code (ECC), synchronous dynamic
random access memory (SDRAM)
(complying with PC 133 SDRAM
Registered DIMM Specification,
Revision 1.0 or later). When installed
in systems using 100 MHz front-side
bus microprocessors, the memory
operates at 100 MHz.
Four dual inline memory-module
(DIMM) sockets
Diskette Drive
Standard: One 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB
Hard Disk Drives
Up to six hot-swappable hard disk
drives supported
CD-ROM Drive
Standard: 40X IDE
Keyboard and Auxiliary Device
(standard only on tower models)
Keyboard
Mouse
Expansion Bays
Six slim (1-inch) or three half-high
(1.6-inch) hot-swap drive bays
Three 5.25-inch non-hot-swap bays
(one contains the CD-ROM drive)
Table 1. Server features
2
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Expansion Slots
Up to five PCI adapters supported.
Three 64-bit hot-plug PCI slots
Two standard (non-hot-plug) 32-bit
PCI slots
Upgradable Microcode
BIOS, diagnostics, and Advanced
System Management Processor
upgrades (when available) can
update EEPROMs on the system
board
Security Features
Door and side cover lock (tower
model only)
Power-on and administrator
passwords
Selectable drive-startup
Keyboard password
System management security
– User log-in password
– Read-only or read/write access
– Dial back
Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA)
Alerts
Power supplies
Fans
Memory
Hard disk drives
Microprocessors
Voltage regulator modules (VRMs)
Integrated Functions
Two serial ports
Two universal serial bus (USB) ports
One parallel port
Mouse port
Keyboard port
Video port
Advanced System Management
Interconnect port
Two SCSI ports (one internal, one
external)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet port
(controller on system board)
Redundant Ethernet capability,
through the use of an optional
network interface card (NIC)
Advanced System Management
Processor on system board
Dedicated Advanced System
Management I/O port
Video controller (with 4 MB video
memory) compatible with:
– Super video graphics array
(SVGA)
– Video graphics adapter (VGA)
Power Supply
Two 250 W (115–230 V ac)
– Standard - 500 W non-redundant,
250 W redundant
– Optional - Additional 250 W
power supply is available for
500 W redundancy
Automatic voltage range selection
Built-in overload and surge protection
Automatic restart after a loss of
power
Redundant Cooling
Three hot-swap fans
The following table provides the specifications for the xSeries 240 server.
Size (Tower Model)
– Depth: 659.3 mm (26 in.)
– Height: 426.5 mm (16.8 in.)
– Width: 217.3 mm (8.6 in.)
Size (Rack Model)
Electrical Input
Sine-wave input (50 to 60 Hz) is
required
Sound power, idling: 6.6 bel
maximum
Input voltage:
Sound power, operating: 6.8 bel
maximum
– Low range:
- Maximum: 137 V ac
– High range:
– Width: 426.6 mm (16.8 in.)
Heat Output
Approximate heat output in British
Thermal Units (Btu) per hour:
– Minimum configuration:
683 Btu (200 watts)
– Server on: 10° to 35° C
(50° to 95° F)
Altitude: 0 to 914 m (3000 ft.)
– Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA)
approximately:
- Minimum configuration as
shipped: 0.08 kVA
- Maximum configuration:
0.52 kVA
Weight (Rack Model)
Maximum configuration: 36.2 kg
(79.8 lb)
Air temperature:
- Maximum: 265 V ac
Maximum configuration: 37.5 kg
(82.7 lb)
Minimum configuration: 25.3 kg
(55.8 lb)
Environment
- Minimum: 180 V ac
Weight (Tower Model)
Minimum configuration: 26.6 kg
(58.6 lb)
Sound pressure, operating: 67 dBa
maximum
- Minimum: 90 V ac
– Depth: 629.3 mm (24.8 in.)
– Height: 217.3 mm (8.6 in.)
(5 U)
Acoustical Noise Emissions Values
Power Available for Drives
Each hot-swap drive bay:
–
+5 V dc line: 15 A
–
+12 V dc line: 17.2 A
– Server on: 10° to 32° C
(50° to 90° F)
Altitude: 914 m (3000 ft.) to
2133 m (7000 ft.)
– Server off: 10° to 43° C
(50° to 110° F)
Maximum Altitude: 2133 m
(7000 ft.)
Humidity:
– Server on: 8% to 80%
– Server off: 8% to 80%
Maximum altitude: 2133 m
(7000 ft)
– Maximum configuration:
2048 Btu (600 watts)
Table 2. Server specifications
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM xSeries 240
3
What your server offers
The unique design of your IBM xSeries 240 takes advantage of advancements in
symmetric multiprocessing (SMP), data storage, and memory management. Your
server combines:
Impressive performance using an innovative approach to SMP
Your server supports up to two Pentium III microprocessors. Your server
comes with one microprocessor installed; you can install an additional
microprocessor to enhance performance and provide SMP capability.
Large data-storage and hot-swap capabilities
All models of the server support up to six hot-swap hard disk drives. This
hot-swap feature enables you to remove and replace hard disk drives without
turning off the server.
Hot-plug PCI adapter capabilities
Your server has three hot-plug slots for PCI adapters. This feature is
sometimes referred to as Active PCI. With operating system support, you can
replace failing hot-plug PCI adapters without turning off the server. If the
hot-add feature is supported by your operating system and the PCI adapter,
you can also add PCI adapters in these slots without turning off the server.
Redundant cooling and power capabilities
The redundant cooling and hot-swap capabilities of the fans in your server
allow continued operation if one of the fans fails. You can also replace a failing
fan without turning off the server.
The two 250-watt power supplies in your server provide redundant power for
many configurations of your server. If the average load on your server is less
than 250 watts and a problem occurs with one of the power supplies, the other
power supply can handle the load. For power loads above 250 watts, you can
install a third, optional power supply to provide a full 500 watts of power. The
NON REDUNDANT light emitting diode (LED) on the diagnostic LED panel is lit
when the power load is 250 watts or greater with two power supplies installed.
Large system memory
The memory bus in your server supports up to 4 GB of system memory. The
memory controller provides error correcting code (ECC) support for up to four
industry-standard PC133, 3.3 V, 168-pin, 8-byte, registered,
synchronous-dynamic-random access memory (SDRAM) DIMMs (Intel
PC-Registered SDIMM Specifications, Revision 1.0 or later), synchronous, dual
inline memory modules.
4
IBM xSeries User's Reference
System-management capabilities
Your server comes with an Advanced System Management Processor on the
system board. This processor, in conjunction with the systems-management
software provided with your server, allows you to manage the functions of the
server locally and remotely. The Advanced System Management Processor
also provides system monitoring, event recording, and dial-out alert capability.
Note: The Advanced System Management Processor is sometimes referred to
as the service processor.
Refer to the information provided with the systems-management software for
more information.
Integrated network environment support
Your server comes with an Ethernet controller on the system board. This
Ethernet controller has an interface for connecting to 10-Mbps or 100-Mbps
networks. The server automatically selects between 10BASE-T and
100BASE-TX. The controller provides full-duplex (FDX) capability, which allows
simultaneous transmission and reception of data on the Ethernet local area
network (LAN).
Redundant network-interface card
The addition of an optional, redundant network interface card (NIC) provides a
failover capability to a redundant Ethernet connection. If a problem occurs with
the primary Ethernet connection, all Ethernet traffic associated with this primary
connection is automatically switched to the redundant NIC. This switching
occurs without data loss and without user intervention.
IBM ServerGuide CDs
The ServerGuide CDs included with your server provide programs to help you
set up your server and install the network operating system (NOS). The
ServerGuide program detects the hardware options installed and provides the
correct configuration program and device drivers. For more information, see
the ServerGuide topic provided on the IBM xSeries Documentation CD.
Your server is designed to be cost-effective, powerful, and flexible. It uses
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus architecture to provide compatibility
with a wide range of existing hardware devices and software applications.
As always, your IBM server meets stringent worldwide certifications for power,
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), and safety.
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM xSeries 240
5
Reliability, availability, and serviceability features
Three of the most important features in server design are reliability, availability, and
serviceability (RAS). These factors help to ensure the integrity of the data stored
on your server; that your server is available when you want to use it; and that
should a failure occur, you can easily diagnose and repair the failure with minimal
inconvenience.
The following is an abbreviated list of the RAS features that your server supports.
Menu-driven setup, system configuration, RAID configuration, and diagnostic
programs
Power-on self-test (POST)
Integrated Advanced System Management Processor
Predictive failure alerts
System auto-configuring from configuration menu
Remote system problem-determination support
Power and temperature monitoring
Fault-resilient startup
Hot-swap drive bays
Support for hot-plug PCI adapters
Error codes and messages
System error logging
Upgradable BIOS, diagnostics, and Advanced System Management Processor
code
Automatic restart after a power failure
Parity checking on the SCSI and PCI buses
Error checking and correcting (ECC) memory
Redundant hot-swap power supply option
Redundant hot-swap cooling
Redundant Ethernet capabilities (with optional adapter)
Vital Product Data (VPD) on processor complex, system board, power
backplane, SCSI backplane, and each power supply.
Operator information and diagnostic LED panels
Customer support center 24 hours per day 7 days a week1
Remote Connect
Light Path Diagnostics
1
6
Service availability will vary by country. Response time will vary depending on the number and nature of incoming calls.
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Controls and indicators
The most commonly used controls and indicators on the front of the server appear
in the following illustrations.
Tower model
Rack model
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM xSeries 240
7
1 Operator Information Panel: The lights on this panel provide status
information for your server. See “Operator information panel” on page 10 for
more information.
2 Diskette-Eject Button: Press this button to eject a diskette from the drive.
3 Diskette Drive In-Use Light: When this light is on, the diskette drive is being
accessed.
4 CD-ROM Eject/Load Button: Press this button to eject or retract the
CD-ROM tray so that you can insert or remove a CD.
5 Hard Disk Status Light: Each of the hot-swap drive bays has a Hard Disk
Status light. When this amber light is on continuously, the drive has failed.
When the light flashes slowly (one flash per second), the drive is being rebuilt.
When the light flashes rapidly (three flashes per second), the controller is
identifying the drive.
6 Hard Disk Activity Light: Each of the hot-swap drive bays has a Hard Disk
Activity light. When this green light is flashing, the drive is being accessed.
7 Cover Release Lever: Use this lever to release the left-side cover on the
tower model or the top cover on the rack model.
8 Reset Button: Press this button to reset the server and run the power-on
self-test (POST).
9 Power Control Button: Press this button to manually turn the server on or
off. (See “Turning on the server” on page 9 and “Turning off the server” on
page 9 for more information.)
1 CD-ROM Drive In-Use Light: When this light is on, the CD-ROM drive is
being accessed.
11 CD-ROM Manual Tray-Release Opening: Insert a straightened paper clip in
the opening to release the CD-ROM tray when using the CD-ROM eject
button is not successful.
8
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Turning on the server
Use the following instructions to turn on the server.
You can turn on the server by pressing the Power Control button on the front of
the server.
Note: If you have just plugged the power cord of your server into an electrical
outlet, wait approximately 20 seconds before pressing the Power
Control button.
If the server is turned on and a power failure occurs, the server will start
automatically when power is restored.
The Advanced System Management Processor can also turn on the server.
Turning off the server
Use the following instructions to turn off the server.
5
CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the
power supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the
device. The device also might have more than one power cord. To
remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all power
cords are disconnected from the power source.
2
1
You can turn off the server by pressing the Power Control button on the front of
the server. Pressing the Power Control button starts an orderly shutdown of
the operating system, if this feature is supported by your operating system, and
places the server in standby mode.
Note: After turning off the server, wait at least 5 seconds before pressing the
Power Control button to power the server on again.
You can press and hold the Power Control button for more than 4 seconds to
cause an immediate shutdown of the server and place the server in standby
mode. This feature can be used if the operating system halts.
You can disconnect the server power cords from the electrical outlets to shut
off all power to the server.
Note: Wait about 15 seconds after disconnecting the power cords for your
system to stop running. Watch for the System Power light on the
operator information panel to stop blinking.
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM xSeries 240
9
Operator information panel
The operator information panel on the front of the server contains status lights.
OK
1
2
100 LINK TX
MB OK
RX
1 System Power Light: When this green light is on, system power is present
in the server. When this light flashes, the server is in standby mode (the
system power supply is turned off and ac current is present). When this light
is off, either a power supply, ac power, or a light has failed.
Attention: If this light is off, it does not mean there is no electrical current
present in the server. The light might be burned out. To remove all electrical
current from the server, you must unplug the server power cords from the
electrical outlets.
2 System POST Complete Light: This green light is on when the power-on
self-test (POST) completes without any errors.
3 SCSI Hard Disk Drive Activity Light: This green light is on when there is
activity on a hard disk drive.
4 Processor 1 Activity Light: This green light is on when there is
microprocessor 1 activity.
5 Processor 2 Activity Light: This green light is on when there is
microprocessor 2 activity.
6 Information Light: This amber light is on when the information log contains
information about certain conditions in your server that might affect
performance. For example, the light will be on if your server does not have
redundant power. A light on the diagnostic LED panel will also be on. (For
more information, see “Identifying problems using status LEDs” on page 151.)
7 System Error Light: This amber light is on when a system error occurs. A
light on the diagnostic LED panel will also be on to further isolate the error.
(For more information, see “Identifying problems using status LEDs” on
page 151.)
8 Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity Light: When this green light is on,
there is transmit or receive activity to or from the server.
9 Ethernet Link Status Light: When this green light is on, there is an active
connection on the Ethernet port.
1 Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps Light: When this green light is on, the Ethernet
speed is 100 Mbps. When the light is off, the Ethernet speed is 10 Mbps.
10
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Input/output connectors and expansion slots
The following illustrations show the expansion slots and the input/output connectors
(ports) on the rear of the server.
Tower model
DC
DC
AC
AC
Rack model
DC
AC
DC
AC
1 Advanced System Management Interconnect Knockout: Your server has
an external connector knockout for the Advanced System Management
Interconnect option. This option allows you to connect rack or multirack
systems through a daisy-chain cable in half-duplex mode.
2 External Connector Knockout: Your server has an external connector
knockout that can be used when you install options.
3 PCI Expansion Slots: Your server has five available peripheral component
interconnect (PCI) expansion slots. Three of the PCI slots support hot-plug
PCI (sometimes referred to as Active PCI) adapters.
Many adapters provide bus-master capabilities, which enable the adapters to
perform operations without interrupting the system microprocessors.
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM xSeries 240
11
4 Serial A Connector: A serial signal cable for a modem or other serial device
connects to this 9-pin serial connector. Serial port A can be shared by the
Advanced System Management Processor and the operating system. See
“Devices and I/O Ports” on page 22 for port assignment information. If you
are using a 25-pin signal cable, you need a 9-pin-to-25-pin adapter cable.
5 Serial B Connector: A serial signal cable for a modem or other serial device
connects to this 9-pin serial connector. Serial port B is used by the operating
system and cannot be shared by the Advanced System Management
Processor. See “Devices and I/O Ports” on page 22 for port assignment
information. If you are using a 25-pin signal cable, you need a 9-pin-to-25-pin
adapter cable.
6 Hot-Plug PCI Expansion Slots: Your server has three hot-plug PCI
expansion slots.
7 Attention Lights for Hot-Plug PCI Slots: Each hot-plug PCI slot has an
Attention light that is visible from the rear of the server. An Attention light
flashes approximately once per second when it is on. The meaning of the
Attention lights is defined by your operating system. Refer to your operating
system documentation to determine if it supports hot-plug PCI adapters and, if
so, what the Attention lights indicate.
8 Non-Hot-Plug PCI Expansion Slots: Your server has two non-hot-plug PCI
expansion slots.
9 Parallel Connector: A signal cable for a parallel device, such as a printer,
connects here.
1 SCSI Connector: External SCSI devices attach here. For more information,
see “Connecting external options” on page 90.
11 Management Port C Connector: This connector is used to attach a modem
that is dedicated to communication with the Advanced System Management
Processor.
12 Video Connector: The monitor signal cable connects here.
13 Universal Serial Bus 1 and 2 Connectors: You can attach an I/O device to
either of these Universal Serial Bus (USB) connectors. USB 2 is the
connector nearest to the edge of the server. You need a 4-pin cable to
connect a device to USB 1 or 2.
Note: If a standard (non-USB) keyboard is attached to the keyboard port, the
USB ports are disabled while the power-on self-test (POST) is
running, and no USB devices will work during POST.
14 Ethernet Connector: Your server has one RJ-45 Ethernet connector. This
connector is for attaching the network cable to the integrated 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX, twisted-pair transceiver.
15 Mouse Connector: The mouse cable connects here. This port sometimes is
called an auxiliary-device or pointing-device port.
16 Keyboard Connector: The keyboard cable connects here.
17 Power Connectors: The power cords for the power supplies connect here.
Note: For pin assignments and other details about these connectors, see
“Connecting external options” on page 90.
12
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Power supplies
The following illustrations show the power supplies and power lights on your server.
Your server comes with two hot-swap power supplies installed. You can install a
third power supply. (See “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page 79 for
instructions about installing an additional power supply and information about power
redundancy.)
Note: See “Power cords” on page 14 for information about power cords for use
with your server in your country or region.
Tower model
Rack model
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM xSeries 240
13
1 Power Supply 1: Your server comes with two hot-swap power supplies
installed.
2 Power Supply 2: Your server comes with two hot-swap power supplies
installed.
3 Filler Panel: You can remove this filler panel and install a third hot-swap
power supply in power supply bay 3.
4 Power Supply 2 Power Connector: The power cord for power supply 2
connects here.
5 Power Supply 1 Power Connector: The power cord for power supply 1
connects here.
6 DC Power Light: This light provides status information about the power
supply. During normal operation, both the AC and DC Power lights are on.
For any other combination of lights, see “Power supply LEDs” on page 152
for more information.
7 AC Power Light: This light provides status information about the power
supply. During normal operation, both the AC and DC Power lights are on.
For any other combination of lights, see “Power supply LEDs” on page 152
for more information.
Power cords
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use
with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and
plug with a properly grounded outlet.
IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.
14
IBM xSeries User's Reference
IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that
country or region.
IBM power
cord part
number
Used in these countries and regions
13F9940
Argentina, Australia, China (PRC), New Zealand, Papua New Guinea,
Paraguay, Uruguay, Western Samoa
13F9979
Afghanistan, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Austria, Belgium, Benin, Bulgaria,
Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cameroon, Central African Rep., Chad, Czech
Republic, Egypt, Finland, France, French Guiana, Germany, Greece, Guinea,
Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Ivory Coast, Jordan, Lebanon, Luxembourg,
Macau, Malagasy, Mali, Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius, Monaco, Morocco,
Mozambique, Netherlands, New Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland, Portugal,
Romania, Senegal, Slovakia, Spain, Sudan, Sweden, Syria, Togo, Tunisia,
Turkey, former USSR, Vietnam, former Yugoslavia, Zaire, Zimbabwe
13F9997
Denmark
14F0015
Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka
14F0033
Antigua, Bahrain, Brunei, Channel Islands, Cyprus, Dubai, Fiji, Ghana, Hong
Kong, India, Iraq, Ireland, Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Nepal,
Nigeria, Polynesia, Qatar, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda, United
Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia
14F0051
Liechtenstein, Switzerland
14F0069
Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya, Somalia
14F0087
Israel
1838574
Thailand
62X1045
Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala,
Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Japan, Korea (South), Liberia, Mexico,
Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia,
Suriname, Taiwan, Trinidad (West Indies), United States of America,
Venezuela
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM xSeries 240
15
16
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Chapter 2. Arranging your workspace
To get the most from your server, arrange both the equipment you use and your
work area to suit your needs and the kind of work you do. Your comfort is of
foremost importance, but light sources, air circulation, and the location of electrical
outlets also can affect the way you arrange your workspace.
Comfort
Although no single working position is ideal for everyone, here are a few guidelines
to help you find a position that suits you best.
Sitting in the same position for a long time can cause fatigue. A good chair can
make a big difference. The backrest and seat should adjust independently and
provide good support. The seat should have a curved front to relieve pressure on
the thighs. Adjust the seat so that your thighs are parallel to the floor and your feet
are either flat on the floor or on a footrest.
When using the keyboard, keep your forearms parallel to the floor and your wrists
in a neutral, comfortable position. Try to keep a light touch on the keyboard and
your hands and fingers relaxed. You can change the angle of the keyboard for
maximum comfort by adjusting the position of the keyboard feet.
Viewing Distance
Lower
Back
Support
Seat
Height
Adjust the monitor so the top of the screen is at, or slightly below, eye level. Place
the monitor at a comfortable viewing distance, usually 51 to 61 cm (20 to 24 in.),
and position it so you can view it without having to twist your body. Also position
other equipment you use regularly, such as the telephone or a mouse, within easy
reach.
Glare and lighting
Position the monitor to minimize glare and reflections from overhead lights,
windows, and other light sources. Even reflected light from shiny surfaces can
cause annoying reflections on your monitor screen. Place the monitor at right
angles to windows and other light sources, when possible. Reduce overhead
lighting, if necessary, by turning off lights or using lower wattage bulbs. If you
install the monitor near a window, use curtains or blinds to block the sunlight. You
might have to adjust the Brightness and Contrast controls on the monitor as the
room lighting changes throughout the day.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
17
Where it is impossible to avoid reflections or to adjust the lighting, an antiglare filter
placed over the screen might be helpful. However, these filters might affect the
clarity of the image on the screen; try them only after you have exhausted other
methods of reducing glare.
Dust buildup compounds problems associated with glare. Remember to clean your
monitor screen periodically using a soft cloth moistened with a nonabrasive liquid
glass cleaner.
Air circulation
Your server and monitor produce heat. Your server has one or more fans that pull
in fresh air and force out hot air. The monitor lets hot air escape through vents.
Blocking the air vents can cause overheating, which might result in a malfunction or
damage. Place the server and monitor so that nothing blocks the air vents; usually,
15 cm (6 inches)of air space is sufficient. Also, make sure the vented air is not
blowing on someone else.
Electrical outlets and cable lengths
The location of electrical outlets and the length of power cords and cables that
connect to the monitor, printer, and other devices might determine the final
placement of your server.
When arranging your workspace:
Avoid the use of extension cords. When possible, plug the server power cords
directly into electrical outlets.
Keep power cords and cables neatly routed away from walkways and other
areas where they might get kicked accidentally.
18
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
This chapter provides information about the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
This program is part of the basic input/output system (BIOS) that comes with your
server. Using these programs, you can set the system date and time, define input
and output device parameters, and define system security.
The ROM-based diagnostic program that comes with the server provides diagnostic
support for the system memory, disk drives, and other system components.
Configuration overview
You play a key role in how your server allocates resources to organize and
interconnect hardware devices and software programs. This allocation process is
referred to as configuration. The steps required to configure your server depend on
the number and types of devices and programs that you install.
Your server supports PCI adapters and SCSI devices. Because of this flexibility,
you can choose from among many adapters and devices.
In general, the greater the number and variety of hardware devices and software
programs that you install in your server, the more you will have to interact with your
server and your devices to correctly configure your system.
Your server comes with the following hardware configuration programs:
Configuration/Setup Utility program
With the built-in Configuration/Setup Utility program, you can change serial and
parallel port assignments, interrupt request (IRQ) settings, and the startup
sequence for drives that you install. You also can use this program to set
passwords for starting up the server and accessing the Configuration/Setup
Utility program.
SCSISelect Utility program
With the built-in SCSISelect Utility program, you can configure the SCSI
devices that you attach to the SCSI controller. You can use SCSISelect to
change default values, resolve configuration conflicts, and perform a low-level
format on a SCSI hard disk drive.
Before installing a new device or program, read the documentation that comes with
it. Reading the instructions helps you to determine the steps required for
installation and configuration.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
19
The Configuration/Setup Utility program
For most configurations, the server will operate using the default system settings.
You need to change the settings only to resolve configuration conflicts or to enable
or change device functions (for example, defining diskette types, and so on).
When you want or need to change the default settings, the Configuration/Setup
Utility program provides a convenient way to display and change the settings.
After you run and exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility program, configuration
information is stored in electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
(EEPROM). While the server is off, the configuration information remains available
for the next system startup.
Always run the Configuration/Setup Utility program if you add, remove, or relocate
any hardware option, or if you receive an error message instructing you to do so.
Review this chapter and the information that comes with the option before making
changes.
To start the Configuration/Setup Utility program:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
2. When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.
Note: If you enter the power-on password and an administrator
(supervisor-level) password is also set, a limited version of the menu
appears. To see the full menu, you must restart the server and enter
the administrator password when you are prompted to enter a
password. See “System Security” on page 23 for additional
information.
The Configuration/Setup Utility main menu appears. For information about the
menu, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 21.
Notes:
a. When the message Press F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2 to run
the diagnostic programs. For information about running the diagnostic
programs, see “Diagnostic programs” on page 110.
b. When the message Press Alt-F1 for System Partition Boot appears,
press Alt+F1 to start the system from the system partition. See the
ServerGuide topic for information about using ServerGuide to create a
system partition.
20
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
From the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu, you can select settings that you
want to change. The Configuration/Setup Utility main menu is similar to the
following screen.
Configuration/Setup Utility
• System Summary
• System Information
• Devices and I/O Ports
• Date and Time
• System Security
• Start Options
• Advanced Setup
• Error Logs
Save Settings
Restore Settings
Load Default Settings
Exit Setup
<F1> Help
<Esc> Exit
< ↑ > < ↓ > Move
<Enter> Select
Pressing F1 displays Help information for a selected menu item.
Note: The choices on some menus might differ slightly, depending on the BIOS
version that comes with your server.
To change configuration settings:
1. Use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight the menu item for the configuration
setting that you want to change; then, press Enter.
2. Use the Left or Right Arrow key to choose the appropriate setting for the
selected menu item; then, press Enter.
3. Repeat step 1 through step 2 for each setting that you want to change. Press
Esc to return to the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
4. After making changes, you can select:
Save Settings to save the selected changes.
Restore Settings to delete the changes and restore the previous settings.
Load Default Settings to cancel the changes and restore the factory
settings.
Note: The Configuration/Setup Utility main menu selections do not save
settings, restore settings, or load default settings for the PCI Slot/Device
Information choice. To save settings, or restore settings for the PCI
Slot/Device Information choice, you must use the menu selections
available from the PCI Slot/Device Information choice.
5. To exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu, select Exit Setup. If
you made any changes and did not save them with the Save Settings choice,
the system prompts you to save or discard the changes when you attempt to
exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
21
System Summary
Select this choice to display configuration information, including the type and speed
of the microprocessors and amount of memory.
Changes that you make to configuration settings appear on this summary screen.
You cannot edit the fields.
The System Summary choice appears on the full Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu and on the limited Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
System Information
Select this choice to display information about your server. Changes that you make
on other menus might appear on this summary screen. You cannot edit any fields.
The System Information choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
Product Data
Select this choice to view system information, such as the machine type and model,
the system serial number, and the revision level or issue date of the BIOS stored
on the flash electronically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM).
System Card Data
Select this choice to view vital product data (VPD) for some server components.
Devices and I/O Ports
Software recognizes ports through their port assignments. Each port must have a
unique port assignment. The Configuration/Setup Utility program normally handles
this, but you might have special hardware or software that requires you to change
these assignments.
Select the Devices and I/O Ports choice to view or change the assignments for
devices and input/output ports.
You can add serial ports by installing a serial adapter in an expansion slot. See
the documentation that comes with the serial adapter for information about port
assignments.
You can configure the parallel port as bidirectional; that is, so that data can be both
read from and written to a device. In bidirectional mode, the server supports
Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) and Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP).
To display or change the assignments for devices, the serial ports, or parallel port:
1. Select Devices and I/O Ports.
2. Select a device or port; use the Left or Right Arrow key to advance through the
settings.
The Devices and I/O Ports choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup
Utility main menu.
22
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Notes:
1. When you configure the parallel port as bidirectional, use an IEEE
1284-compliant cable. The maximum length of the cable must not exceed 3
meters (9.8 feet).
2. The Universal Serial Bus (USB) is configured automatically.
3. If you install a USB keyboard that has a mouse port, the USB keyboard
emulates a mouse and you will not be able to disable the mouse settings in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Date and Time
Select this choice to set the system date and time and to change the system time
sent to the Advanced System Management Processor (service processor) when the
server is started.
The system time is in a 24-hour format: hour:minute:second.
The system date is in standard format for your country. For example, in the United
States, the format is MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year).
Select Date and Time; then, use the Left or Right Arrow key to advance through
each data field. Type the new information; the system saves the information as
you type it.
You can set a time delta to be added or subtracted from the system time that is
sent to the service processor (Advanced System Management Processor) each
time the server is started. Use the number keys to enter the hours and minutes
and + or − to add or subtract from the system time. If the system clock time should
be the same as the Advanced System Management Processor clock time, leave
the value set at the default of 0.
The Date and Time choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu.
System Security
To control access to the information in your server databases, you can implement
two levels of password protection. Implementing these security measures helps
you to ensure the integrity of the data and programs that are stored in your server.
After you set a power-on password, you can enable the unattended-start mode.
This locks the keyboard and mouse, but allows the system to start the operating
system. The keyboard and mouse remain locked until you enter the correct
password.
The System Security choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
After you set a power-on or administrator password, you must enter the password
when you turn on the server. (The passwords do not appear on the screen as you
type them.)
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
23
Type of Password
Results
No password set
No password required to start the system.
You can access all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
Power-on password only
You must enter the password to complete the system startup.
You can access all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
Administrator password only
No password is required to start the system.
You must enter the password to access the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
The Administrator password provides access to all choices on
the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Administrator and power-on
password
You can enter either password to complete the system startup.
The administrator password provides access to all choices on
the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. You can set,
change, or delete both the administrator and power-on
passwords, and allow a power-on password to be changed by
the user.
The power-on password provides access to a limited set of
choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. This
limited access might include changing or deleting the power-on
password.
If you forget the power-on password, and the administrator
password has been set, use the administrator password at the
power-on password prompt; then, start the Configuration/Setup
Utility program and change the power-on password.
Using the power-on password menu
When a power-on password is set, you must enter a password each time that you
start the system.
When a power-on password is set, POST does not complete until you enter the
password. If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the
server through one of the following methods:
If an administrator password has been set, enter the administrator password at
the power-on prompt. (If necessary, see “Using the administrator password
menu” on page 25 for details.) Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program
and change the power-on password as previously described in this section (see
steps 1 through 5 on page 25).
You can change the position of the password override switch (switch 4 of
switch block 2) to the ON position as described in “Bypassing an unknown
power-on password” on page 103.
You can remove the battery as described in “Replacing the battery” on
page 157 and then install the battery.
To set a power-on password:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password menu appears.
2. Type the password in the Enter Power-on Password data field.
You can use any combination of up to seven characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9)
for your power-on password. Keep a record of your password in a secure
place.
24
IBM xSeries User's Reference
3. Move the cursor to the Enter Power-on Password Again data field and type
the password again.
Note: A message appears if the two passwords do not match. If this
happens, press Esc to cancel the request and return to the System
Security menu.
4. If a message appears telling you to select another password, press Enter to
return to the Power-On Password menu. Choose a different password to use
for your power-on password.
5. Select Change Power-on Password to save the new password; then, press
Enter.
To delete a power-on password:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password menu appears.
2. Select Delete Power-on Password; then, press Enter. A confirmation window
appears.
3. Press Enter to delete the power-on password, or press Esc to cancel the
request and return to the System Security menu.
To allow the system to start in unattended-start mode when a power-on password
is set:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password screen appears.
2. Select Allow for unattended boot with password. Press the Left or Right
Arrow key to toggle the entry to On.
Note: The Allow for unattended boot with password data field must be set
to On for the system to support locally or remotely scheduled system
shutdowns or restarts in unattended-start mode.
Using the administrator password menu
The administrator password (sometimes called a supervisor-level password)
controls access to some features of the server, including the Configuration/Setup
Utility program.
Attention:
If an administrator password is set and then forgotten, it cannot be overridden or
removed. You must replace the system board.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
25
To set an administrator password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System Security menu: then, press
Enter.
The Administrator Password menu appears.
2. Type the password in the Enter Administrator Password data field.
A password can contain any combination of up to seven alphanumeric
characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9). Keep a record of your password in a secure
place.
3. Move the cursor to the Enter Administrator Password Again data field and
type the password again.
Note: A message appears if the two passwords do not match. If this
happens, press Esc to cancel the request and return to the System
Security menu.
4. If a message appears telling you to select another password, press Enter to
return to the Administrator Password menu. Choose a different password to
use for your administrator password.
5. Select Change Administrator Password to save the new password; then,
press Enter. The password becomes effective immediately.
To delete an administrator password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System Security menu; then, press
Enter.
The Administrator Password menu appears.
2. Select Delete Administrator Password; then, press Enter.
3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to delete the administrator
password. Press Esc to return to the System Security menu.
To enable a user to change the power-on password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System Security menu; then, press
Enter.
The Administrator Password screen appears.
2. Select Power-on password changeable by user. Press the Left or Right
Arrow key to toggle the entry to Yes.
When this choice is enabled, System Security appears on the limited
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. The System Security menu contains the
Power-on Password choice.
Defining a system owner's name
You can specify a system owner's name that displays during POST. The system
owner's name can only be removed or changed from the System Security menu. If
you set an administrator password, only the administrator can set, change, or
delete the system owner's name.
To set the system owner's name:
1. Select System Owner's Name from the System Security screen, and press
Enter.
26
IBM xSeries User's Reference
2. Type the name in the Enter system owner's name string data field.
3. Press the Down Arrow key to select the Set or change system owner's name
data field.
4. Press Enter to set the name or change a previously defined name.
You can use any combination of up to 16 characters in the system owner's name.
To delete the system owner's name, select Delete stored system owners name;
then, press Enter.
Start Options
Start options take effect when you start your server.
You can select keyboard operating characteristics, such as the keyboard speed.
You also can specify whether the keyboard number lock starts on or off. You also
can enable the server to run without a diskette drive, monitor, or keyboard.
The server uses a startup sequence to determine the device from which the
operating system loads. For example, you can define a startup sequence that
checks for a startable diskette in the diskette drive, then checks the hard disk drive
in bay 1, and then checks a network adapter.
You can also select which PCI SCSI adapter is given boot precedence. The first
drive that is attached to the selected adapter will be assigned drive number 80L
and the operating system will start from that drive. The default for boot precedence
is Disabled. The range of choices depends upon the number of PCI SCSI adapters
installed in the server.
You can enable a virus-detection test that checks for changes in the master boot
record at startup. You also can choose to run POST in the enhanced mode or the
quick mode.
Select Start Options; then, use the Left or Right Arrow key to advance through
each data field.
The Start Options choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu.
Advanced Setup
Select Advanced Setup to change values for advanced hardware features, such
as cache control, and PCI configuration.
A warning message displays above the choices on this menu, to alert you that the
system might malfunction if these options are configured incorrectly. Follow the
instructions on the screen carefully.
Use the Left or Right Arrow key to scroll through each data field after you select
one of the setup options.
The Advanced Setup choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
27
Processor Serial Number Access
Select this choice to identify if the microprocessor serial number in the
microprocessor is readable.
Core Chipset Control
Select this choice to modify settings that control features of the core chip set on the
system board. Do not make changes here unless directed to do so by an IBM
authorized service representative.
Cache Control
Select this choice to enable or disable the microprocessor cache. In addition, you
can define the microprocessor cache type as write-back (WB) or write-through
(WT). Selecting write-back mode will provide the maximum system performance.
PCI Slot/Device Information
Select this choice to view and identify system resources used by PCI devices. PCI
devices automatically communicate with the server configuration information. This
usually results in automatic configuration of a PCI device. If a conflict does occur,
see “Resolving configuration conflicts” on page 30.
Use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight the assignment that you want to
change, and press Enter. Use the Left or Right Arrow key to select from the list of
available choices. An asterisk (*) indicates that more than one device shares a
slot. After making changes, you can select:
Save and exit the PCI Utility to save the changes and return to the Advanced
Setup choice.
Exit the PCI Utility without saving changes to ignore the changes, restore
the previous settings, and return to the Advanced Setup choice.
Note: You can use the menu selections to save settings or restore settings for the
PCI Slot/Device Information choice only. The Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu selections save settings, restore settings, or load default
settings for all other choices, but not the PCI Slot/Device Information choice.
Your server uses a rotational interrupt technique to configure PCI devices.
Because of this technique, you can install a variety of PCI devices that currently do
not support sharing of PCI interrupts (IRQs). Multiple-function PCI devices use
more than one interrupt.
Selecting PCI Device Control allows you to enable or disable the system board
SCSI, video, and Ethernet controllers and the PCI slots.
The default setting is Enable for all the controllers and PCI slots. If you select
Disable, the disabled device will not be configured and will be invisible to the
operating system. This is equivalent to unplugging the device.
If the on-board SCSI controller is disabled and no other controller and mass
storage device are installed, operating-system startup cannot occur.
If the video controller is disabled and no video adapter is installed, the server
will have no video capability. However, turning the server off and on three
times results in a default startup that enables video again.
28
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Memory Settings
Select this choice to manually disable or enable a bank of memory.
If a memory error is detected during POST or memory configuration, the server can
automatically disable the failing memory bank and continue operating with reduced
memory capacity. If this occurs, you must manually enable the memory bank after
the problem is corrected. Select Memory Settings from the Advanced Setup
menu; then use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight the bank that you want to
enable. Use the Left or Right Arrow key to select Enable.
System Service Processor Settings
Select this choice to view the IRQ used by the Advanced System Management
Processor (service processor). You can then use the Left or Right Arrow key to
select the IRQ for the Advanced System Management Processor from the list of
available choices.
Event/Error Logs
Select Event/Error Logs to choose to view either the POST error log or the system
event/error log.
POST Error Log
Select POST Error Log to view the three most recent error codes and messages
that the system generated during POST. You can clear the error log by selecting
Clear error logs.
System Event/Error Log
Select System Event/Error Log to view the system event/error log. The system
event/error log contains all the system error and warning messages that the system
has generated. You can use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow keys to move between
pages in the system event/error log. You can clear the event log by selecting
Clear error logs.
Save Settings
After you make configuration changes, review them to be sure that they contain the
correct information. If the information is correct, select Save Settings to save the
selected changes.
Restore Settings
After you make configuration changes, review them to be sure that they contain the
correct information. If the information is incorrect, or if you do not want to save
these changes, select Restore Settings to delete the changes and restore the
previous settings.
Load Default Settings
If you make configuration changes and then decide that you want to use default
values instead, select Load Default Settings to cancel the changes and restore
the factory settings.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
29
Exit Setup
If you have made any changes, you will be asked if you want to save the changes
or exit without saving the changes.
Configuring options
Before installing a new device or program, read the documentation that comes with
it. Reading the instructions helps you to determine the steps that are required for
installation and configuration. The following list provides a preview of the actions
that might be required to configure your server.
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program and record the current
configuration settings.
See “The Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 20.
2. Set jumpers or switches on the server components.
See “Changing jumper positions” on page 103.
3. Set jumpers or switches on the device.
See the instructions that come with the adapter.
4. Install the adapter in the server.
See “Working with adapters” on page 53.
5. Install software programs.
See the installation instructions that come with the software.
6. Resolve configuration conflicts.
See “Resolving configuration conflicts.”
Resolving configuration conflicts
The resources used by your server consist of interrupt requests, direct memory
access, I/O port addresses, and memory. This information is useful when a
resource configuration conflict occurs.
Conflicts in the configuration occur if:
A device is installed that requires the same resource as another device. (For
example, a conflict occurs when two adapters try to write to the same address
space.)
A device resource is changed (for example, changing jumper settings).
A device function is changed (for example, assigning COM1 to two serial ports).
A software program is installed that requires the same resource as a hardware
device.
The steps required to resolve a configuration error are determined by the number
and variety of hardware devices and software programs that you install. If a
hardware configuration error is detected, a configuration error message appears
after the server completes POST and before the operating system is loaded. You
can bypass the error by pressing Esc while the error message is displayed.
30
IBM xSeries User's Reference
The Configuration/Setup Utility program configures the system hardware and PCI
IRQs. The program does not consider the requirements of the operating system or
the application programs. See “Resolving software configuration conflicts” on
page 31 for additional information.
Resolving hardware configuration conflicts
Use the following information to help resolve hardware configuration conflicts:
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view and change resources
used by the system functions and the installed options. Record the current
settings before making any changes. (See “The Configuration/Setup Utility
program” on page 20 for instructions.)
2. Determine which adapter or device is causing the conflict. (See Chapter 6,
“Solving problems” for instructions.)
3. Change adapter jumpers or switches. Some devices use jumpers and switches
to define the system resources that the devices need. If the settings are
incorrect or set to use a resource that cannot be shared, a conflict occurs and
the device will remain deactivated by the configuration program.
4. Change system jumpers or switches. See “Changing jumper positions” on
page 103.
5. Remove the device or adapter. Some configurations are not supported. If you
must remove an adapter, see “Working with adapters” on page 53.
Resolving software configuration conflicts
The memory-address space and IRQs used by some hardware options might
conflict with addresses defined for use through application programs or the
expanded memory specification (EMS). (EMS is used only with DOS.)
If a conflict exists, one or more of the following conditions might exist:
The system cannot load the operating system.
The system does not work.
An application program does not operate, or it returns an error.
Screen messages indicate that a conflict exists.
To resolve conflicts, you can change the software or hardware configuration.
Note: Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view the addresses used by
your server functions. (See “The Configuration/Setup Utility program” on
page 20 for instructions.)
The best way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to change the addresses used
by the application program or the device driver. You can use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to change addresses.
If a device driver is causing a memory-address conflict, refer to your
operating-system documentation or the documentation that comes with the device
drivers.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
31
Using the SCSISelect utility program
Note: If your server has a RAID adapter installed, use the configuration method
supplied with the RAID adapter to view or change SCSI settings for
attached devices.
Your server comes with a menu-driven configuration utility program, called
SCSISelect, that allows you to view and change SCSI settings.
You can use the SCSISelect Utility program to:
View the default SCSI IDs
Verify and change configuration conflicts
Perform a low-level format on a SCSI hard disk
Starting the SCSISelect Utility program
You can access this program when you start the server. The SCSISelect prompt
appears after the IBM logo appears. Press Ctrl+A immediately after the
SCSISelect prompt appears:
<<< Press <CTRL><A> for SCSISelect Utility! >>>
Note: If an administrator password has been set, a prompt appears asking you to
enter the password to start the SCSISelect Utility program.
You will be prompted to select either channel A (internal) or channel B (external).
Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the highlight bar to the various
menu choices. Press Esc to return to the previous menu. Also, you can press the
F5 key to switch between color and monochrome modes (if your monitor permits).
To change the settings of the displayed items, follow the directions on the screen.
Then, press Enter.
SCSISelect Utility program choices
The following choices appear on the SCSISelect Utility menu:
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings
SCSI Disk Utilities
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings
To view or change the SCSI controller settings, select Configure/View Host
Adapter Settings and follow the directions on the screen.
Note: On the SCSISelect Utility menu, the SCSI controller is referred to as the
Host Adapter.
This menu has the following choices:
Host Adapter SCSI ID
The assigned SCSI ID of the SCSI controller is 7.
SCSI Parity Checking
The assigned value is Enabled.
Host Adapter SCSI Termination
The assigned value is Automatic.
32
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Boot Device Options
Select this choice to configure startable device parameters. Before you can
make updates, you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you
want to configure.
SCSI Device Configuration
Select this choice to configure SCSI device parameters. Before you can make
updates, you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you want to
configure.
Note: When the Maximum Sync Transfer Rate is set to 80.0, this value
represents the transfer rate for UltraSCSI devices. When the Maximum
Sync Transfer Rate is set to 80.0, this value represents the transfer
rate for Ultra2 SCSI LVD devices. When the Maximum Sync Transfer
Rate is set to 20.0, this value represents the transfer rate for Fast SCSI
devices.
Advanced Configuration Options
Select this choice to view or change the settings for advanced configuration
options. These options include enabling support for large hard disk drives and
support for drives with UltraSCSI speed.
To reset the SCSI controller defaults, press F6; then, follow the directions on the
screen.
SCSI Disk Utilities
To see the IDs that are assigned to each SCSI device or to format a SCSI device,
select SCSI Disk Utilities from the SCSISelect Utility menu.
To use the utility program, select a drive from the list. Read the screens carefully
before making a selection.
Note: If the following screen appears, you might have pressed Ctrl+A before the
selected drives were ready. Restart the server and watch the SCSISelect
messages as each drive spins up. After the drive that you want to view or
format spins up, press Ctrl+A.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
33
'
Unexpected SCSI Command Failure
Target SCSI ID:
4
SCSI CDB Sent:
-3 -- -- -- -E -- -7 -- -2 --
Host Adapter Status:
--h - No host adapter error
Target Status:
-2h - Check condition
Sense Key:
-2h - Not ready
+Sense Code:
-4h
+Sense Code Qualifier:
-2h
(
Press 'Esc' to continue.
9
:
Performing a low-level disk format
You can use the Format Disk feature of the SCSISelect Utility program to perform a
low-level format on a hard disk drive.
Depending on the hard disk drive capacity, the Low-Level Format program could
take up to two hours.
When to use the Low-Level Format program
Use the Low-Level Format program:
When you are installing software that requires a low-level format
When you get recurring messages from the diagnostic tests directing you to run
the Low-Level Format program on the hard disk drive
As a last resort before replacing a failing hard disk drive
Note: For information about backing up all of your files, see your operating-system
documentation.
Starting the Low-Level Format program
Note: If your server has a RAID adapter installed, refer to the RAID adapter
documentation for instructions for performing a low-level format on a hard
disk drive attached to the PCI RAID adapter.
1. If the hard disk is working, make a backup copy of all the files and programs on
the hard disk.
Attention: The Low-Level Format program erases all data and programs.
2. Select Format Disk; then, follow the instructions on the screen.
Note: Hard disks normally contain more tracks than their stated capacity (to
allow for defective tracks). A message appears on the screen if the
defect limit is reached. If this happens, have the system serviced.
34
IBM xSeries User's Reference
3. To install an operating system after the hard disk drive is formatted, follow the
instructions in the ServerGuide topic.
Configuring the Ethernet controller
Your IBM xSeries 240 comes with an Ethernet controller on the system board. The
Ethernet controller provides 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX support through the
RJ-45 connector on the back of your server. When you connect your server to the
network, the Ethernet controller automatically detects the data-transfer rate
(10 Mbps or 100 Mbps) on the network and then sets the controller to operate at the
appropriate rate. That is, the Ethernet controller will adjust to the network data
rate, whether the data rate is standard Ethernet (10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet
(100BASE-TX), half duplex (HDX), or full duplex (FDX). This process is also
known as auto-negotiating. This auto-negotiation occurs without requiring software
intervention. The controller supports half-duplex (HDX) and full-duplex (FDX)
modes at both speeds.
Note: The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard requires that the cabling in the
network be Category 5 or higher.
The Ethernet controller is a PCI device, and is therefore, a Plug and Play device.
You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controller for your operating
system before you use the Ethernet controller. However, you must install a device
driver to enable your operating system to address the Ethernet controller (refer to
the ServerGuide topic or to your operating-system documentation).
For troubleshooting information, see “Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller” on
page 148.
If you need additional Ethernet connections, you can install an Ethernet adapter,
such as the IBM 10/100 PCI Ethernet adapter. Review your network-adapter
documentation for any additional configuration requirements and for troubleshooting
information.
Failover for redundant Ethernet
Your IBM xSeries 240 has an integrated Ethernet controller. The IBM Netfinity
10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter is an optional redundant network interface card (NIC
adapter) that you can install in your server. If you install this NIC adapter and
connect it to the same logical segment as the primary Ethernet controller, you can
configure the server to support a failover function. You can configure either the
integrated Ethernet controller or the NIC adapter as the primary Ethernet controller.
In failover mode, if the primary Ethernet controller detects a link failure, all Ethernet
traffic associated with it is switched to the redundant (secondary) controller. This
switching occurs without any user intervention. When the primary link is restored to
an operational state, the Ethernet traffic switches back to the primary Ethernet
controller. The switch back to the primary Ethernet controller can be automatic or
manually controlled depending on the setup and operating system.
Note that only one controller in the redundant pair is active at any given time. For
example, if the primary Ethernet controller is active, the secondary Ethernet
controller cannot be used for any other network operation.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
35
Note: Your operating system determines the maximum number of IBM Netfinity
10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapters that you can install in your server. See the
documentation that comes with the adapter for more information.
Special considerations when combining failover and hot-plug
functions
If your operating system supports hot-plug PCI adapters and the optional redundant
NIC adapter is installed in a hot-plug PCI slot, you can replace the NIC adapter
without turning off the server — even if it is the primary Ethernet controller.
Disconnecting the Ethernet cable from the primary Ethernet controller will cause the
Ethernet traffic to be automatically switched to the secondary Ethernet controller.
This can be very useful when a network problem is caused by faulty adapter
hardware or when you want to upgrade the primary adapter hardware.
Note: If the primary adapter is hot-replaced while the Ethernet traffic is being
handled by the secondary Ethernet controller, the traffic does not
automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the primary adapter
comes back online. See “Configuring for failover.”
Configuring for failover
The failover feature currently is supported by OS/2, Windows NT Server, and
IntraNetWare. The setup required for each operating system follows.
OS/2
Note: The OS/2 operating system does not support hot-plug operations.
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions provided with the
adapter and in “Working with adapters” on page 53.
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet Ethernet Family adapter
device driver. (Refer to the ServerGuide topic.)
3. Using the MPTS Utility program, select the driver from the list and click the Edit
button.
Note: Only one driver instance needs to be loaded for each redundant pair of
Ethernet controllers.
4. Change the PermaNet Server Feature keyword to TRUE and specify the
Primary and Standby slots that contain the redundant pair. Refer to
“System-board component locations” on page 99 for the locations and slot
numbers of the PCI slots. The integrated controller is located in slot 2 (PCI bus
A slot 2).
5. To enable the writing of messages to the IBMCOM\LANTRAN.LOG file when a
failover occurs:
a. Copy the file PCNETOS2.EXE from the root directory of the diskette
created using the ServerGuide CDs to your hard disk.
b. Add the following statement to the CONFIG.SYS file:
Run=d:\path\PCNETOS2.EXE
where d and path are the drive and path to which you copied
PCNETOS2.EXE.
6. Restart the server.
36
IBM xSeries User's Reference
The failover function is now enabled.
Windows NT Server
IBM offers hot-plug support for Windows NT Server Version 4.0. Failover can work
in conjunction with hot-plug support or independently. If you are not using hot-plug
support, go to “Windows NT Server failover setup” on page 38.
Windows NT Server hot-plug setup: IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server
4.0 package is available for download from http://www.ibm.com/pc/support on the
World Wide Web.
Enter the brand type of Server, click on Downloadable files and look for Hot
Plug. The IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package uses the Intel
Desktop Management Interface (DMI) to control hot-plug support for the Ethernet
controllers. The Ethernet controller in your computer is DMI compliant. Download
and install the following software in the order listed:
1. IBM Failover DMI Agent
2. IBM PCI Hot Plug Solution
3. IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter device drivers
Note: The order of installation is important. The IBM Hot Plug for Windows NT
Server 4.0 package must be installed before the IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault
Tolerant Adapter driver is installed. If the adapter device driver is installed
before the PCI Hot Plug Solution package, the adapter device driver will not
recognize the hot-plug code. This happens because the adapter device
driver only checks the NT registry for the Hot Plug package during
installation. If the PCI Hot Plug Solution package is added after the adapter
device driver is installed, the adapter must be removed and added again in
order for it to detect the PCI Hot-Plug Solution code.
To install the IBM Failover DMI Agent:
1. Download the DMI EXE file from the IBM Support Web page, and extract the
files onto a diskette.
2. Insert the diskette into the diskette drive.
3. From the Start menu, select the Run option.
4. Type A:\SETUP.EXE in the Open box.
5. Click Ok. The setup wizard opens.
6. Follow the instructions given by the setup wizard until the program is installed.
7. Restart the server.
To install the IBM PCI Hot Plug Solution package:
1. Download the IBM PCI Hot Plug Services EXE file from the IBM Support Web
page, and extract the files onto a diskette.
2. Log on to Windows NT Server as a user in the Administrator group.
3. Insert the diskette into the diskette drive.
4. From the Start menu, select the Run option.
5. Type A:\SETUP.EXE in the Open box.
6. Click OK. The Setup wizard opens.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
37
7. Follow the instructions given by the setup wizard until the program is installed.
Windows NT Server failover setup: To install the IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault
Tolerant Adapter device drivers:
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions provided with the
adapter and in “Working with adapters” on page 53.
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet Ethernet Family adapter
device driver. (Refer to the ServerGuide topic.)
3. Do not select the Grouping box at this point; you must first restart the server.
4. From the Windows NT Server desktop, select Control Panel, then select the
Network icon, and then select the Adapters tab.
5. Highlight one of the adapters that will be in the redundant pair and then click
the Properties... button.
6. Click the Grouping check box to select it. This will show the possible
combinations for redundant pairs.
7. Select the adapter pair you want and then select OK. Note that the integrated
Ethernet controller is located at PCI bus A, slot 2.
Two options are available for recovering from a failover condition. The options
are determined by the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support check box. If the
IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package is installed, this check
box will appear at the bottom of the Adapter Properties panel. If you do not
have the IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package installed on
your server, you will not see the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support check box.
If the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support check box is not checked or is not
present, traffic will automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the
primary link status is restored. In this mode, the adapter cannot be
hot-swapped. Users with the IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0
package installed should check the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support check
box.
If the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support check box is checked, traffic will
remain on the secondary adapter until the user directs it to return to the primary
adapter. This can be done after the hot-swap replacement of the primary
adapter or by using the DMI interface.
8. Select Close to exit from the Network setup.
When you restart the server, the failover function will be in effect.
If a failover occurs, a message is written to the NT Event Viewer log. In addition, if
the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support check box is checked, a DMI alert will also
be generated.
IntraNetWare
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions provided with the
adapter and in “Working with adapters” on page 53.
2. Load the device driver by using the following command:
LOAD d:\path\PCNTNW.LAN PRIMARY=x SECONDARY=y
where d and path are the drive and path where the driver is located, and x and
y are the PCI slot numbers where the redundant pair is located.
38
IBM xSeries User's Reference
The slot number associated with the integrated Ethernet controller can vary
depending upon the configuration of the server. To determine the slot number,
load the driver with no parameters. The driver will display the available slot
numbers. The slot number that is greater than 10000 will be the slot number of
the integrated Ethernet controller. When the slot number of the integrated
Ethernet controller is determined, reload the driver with the appropriate
parameters.
3. When the driver is loaded, bind it to a protocol stack.
The failover function is now enabled. If a failover occurs:
A message is generated to the operating system console.
The custom counters for the device driver contains variables that define the
state of the failover function and the location of the redundant pair. You can
use the NetWare Monitor to view the custom counters.
Note: If the primary adapter was hot-replaced while the Ethernet traffic was being
handled by the secondary Ethernet controller, the traffic does not
automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the primary adapter
comes back online. In this case, issue the command:
LOAD d:\path\PCNTNW SCAN
where d and path are the drive and path where the driver is located. This
command causes the device driver to locate the primary adapter and switch
the Ethernet traffic to it.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
39
40
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Chapter 4. Installing options
This section provides instructions to help you add options to your server. Some
option-removal instructions are provided, in case you need to remove one option to
install another.
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.
Before you begin
Before you begin to install options in your server, read the following information:
Become familiar with the safety and handling guidelines specified under “Safety
information statements” on page v, “Electrical safety” on page 42 and
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 44. These guidelines will help you
work safely while working with your server or options.
You do not need to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap power
supplies, hot-swap drives, hot-swap fans, or hot-plug PCI adapters.
The orange color on components and labels in your server indicates hot-swap
or hot-plug components. This means that you can install or remove the
component while the system is running, provided that your system is configured
to support this function. For complete details about installing or removing a
hot-swap or hot-plug component, see the information provided in this chapter.
The blue color on components and labels indicates touch points where a
component can be gripped, a latch moved, and so on.
Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical
outlets for your server, monitor, and any other options that you intend to install.
Place your server in a location that is dry. Rain or spilled liquids might damage
your server.
Be sure to leave space around the server to allow the server cooling system to
work properly.
– On a tower model, leave about 127 mm (5 in.) of space around the front
and rear of the server.
– On a rack model, refer to the documentation that comes with the rack.
Leave about 50 mm (2 in.) of ventilated space on the right and left sides of the
server to allow the server cooling system to work properly. Leave 100 mm
(4 in.) of clearance at the rear of the server for cables.
Have a supply of 1 MB and 2 MB, 3.5-inch diskettes available.
Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
Have a small, flat-blade screwdriver available.
For a list of supported options for your server, refer to
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat on the World Wide Web.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
41
Electrical safety
For your safety, do the following before removing the cover:
Note: You do not need to turn off the server and attached devices before you
remove the cover to install or remove a hot-plug PCI adapter (see
“Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter” on page 56), to replace a hot-swap
fan (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly” on page 83), or to check
the diagnostic LED panel.
1. Turn off the server and any attached devices, such as printers, monitors, and
external drives.
2. Unplug all the power cords from electrical outlets.
3. Disconnect all communication cables from external receptacles.
4. Disconnect all cables and power cords from the back of the server.
Note: Reconnect the cables or power cords only after you reassemble the
server and put the cover back on.
8
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the
following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts
inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these
parts, contact a service technician.
42
IBM xSeries User's Reference
1
DANGER
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication
cables is hazardous.
To avoid a shock hazard:
– Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform
installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product
during an electrical storm.
– Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded
electrical outlet.
– Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be
attached to this product.
– When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect
signal cables.
– Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire,
water, or structural damage.
– Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications
systems, networks, and modems before you open the device
covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and
configuration procedures.
– Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following
table when installing, moving, or opening covers on this
product or attached devices.
To Connect:
To Disconnect:
1. Turn everything OFF.
1. Turn everything OFF.
2. First, attach all cables to devices.
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet.
4. Remove all cables from devices.
5. Turn device ON.
Chapter 4. Installing options
43
Working inside the server with power on
Your server is designed with special features that make it highly available. These
features include hot-plug PCI expansion slots and hot-swap fans. You can add or
replace PCI adapters (if supported by your operating system) or replace a fan that
no longer functions. In the past, you would need to turn off the server and
disconnect power to perform these operations. With the hot-plug features, you now
can remove the cover of your server with the power on.
Your server is designed to operate safely while turned on with the cover removed.
Here are some simple guidelines to follow when you work inside a server that is
turned on:
Avoid loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts before
working inside the server; do not wear cufflinks while you are working inside the
server.
Do not allow your necktie to hang inside the server.
Remove jewelry, such as bracelets and loose-fitting wrist watches.
Remove items from your shirt pocket (such as pens or pencils) that could fall
into the server as you lean over it.
Take care to avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hair pins,
or screws, into the server.
Handling static-sensitive devices
Attention:
Static electricity can damage electronic devices and your system. To avoid
damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static protective bag until you are
ready to install them.
To reduce the possibility of electrostatic discharge, observe the following
precautions:
Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around
you.
Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.
Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed printed circuitry.
Do not leave the device where others can handle and possibly damage the
device.
While the device is still in its anti-static package, touch it to an unpainted metal
part of the system unit for at least two seconds. (This drains static electricity
from the package and from your body.)
Remove the device from its package and install it directly into your system unit
without setting it down. If it is necessary to set the device down, place it on its
static-protective package. (If your device is an adapter, place it component side
up.) Do not place the device on your system unit cover or on a metal table.
Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather as heating
reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity.
44
IBM xSeries User's Reference
System reliability considerations
To help ensure proper cooling and system reliability, make sure:
Each of the drive bays has either a drive or a filler panel installed.
Each of the power supply bays has either a power supply or a filler panel
installed.
The cover is in place during normal operation.
Note: The front door (tower model) can be permanently removed without
affecting system reliability.
Be sure to leave space around the server to allow the server cooling system to
work properly.
– On a tower model, leave about 127 mm (5 in.) of space around the front
and rear of the server.
– On a rack model, refer to the documentation that comes with the rack.
The cover is removed for no longer than 30 minutes while the server is
operating.
A removed hot-swap drive is replaced within two minutes of removal.
Cables for optional adapters are routed according to the instructions provided
with the adapters.
A failed fan is replaced within 48 hours.
Chapter 4. Installing options
45
Preparing to install options
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42, “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 44, and “Working inside the server with power on” on page 44.
Hot-swap options
You do not need to turn off the server to work with hot-plug or hot-swap devices,
such as hot-plug PCI adapters, hot-swap hard disk drives, hot-swap power
supplies, and hot-swap fans.
If you are:
Installing or removing a hot-plug PCI adapter, go to “Working with adapters” on
page 53.
Installing or replacing a hot-swap hard disk drive, go to “Installing internal
drives” on page 67.
Installing or replacing a hot-swap power supply, go to “Installing a hot-swap
power supply” on page 79.
Removing a hot-swap power supply, go to “Removing a hot-swap power
supply” on page 81.
Replacing a hot-swap fan, go to “Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly” on
page 83.
Installing or removing an option not listed in the preceding list, continue with the
following steps.
46
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Non-hot-swap options
1. Unlock and open the server door.
7
CAUTION:
If the device has doors, be sure to remove or secure the doors
before moving or lifting the device to avoid personal injury. The
doors will not support the weight of the device.
2. Remove all media (diskettes, CDs, optical discs, or tapes) from the drives; then,
turn off the server and all attached options.
3. Unplug all power cords (cables) from electrical outlets.
4. Note the location of the remaining cables and cords; then disconnect them from
the back of the server.
If you are:
Installing or removing a non-hot-plug adapter, go to “Working with adapters” on
page 53.
Installing or removing a microprocessor, go to “Installing a microprocessor kit”
on page 62.
Installing or removing a memory-module kit, go to “Installing memory-module
kits” on page 65.
Installing or removing a drive in a non-hot-swap drive bay, go to “Installing
internal drives” on page 67.
Chapter 4. Installing options
47
Removing the left-side cover (tower model)
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 44.
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.
CP
U
VR
M
ME
MO
PC
RY
I BU
S
A
B
PO
WE
R
1
2
SU
PP
LY
3
FA
N
HD
D
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
NO
N
1
2
3
PR
OC
ES
SO
R
RE
DU
ND
AN
T
TE
MP
ER
AT
UR
E
1 Cover-release latch
2 Cover
To remove the left-side cover of the tower model or the top cover of the rack
model:
1. If you are planning to install or remove any part other than a hot-swap hard
disk drive, hot-plug adapter, hot-swap power supply, or hot-swap fan, turn off
the server and all attached devices and disconnect all external cables and
power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 46).
2. Slide the cover-release lever 1 on the front of the server to release the cover
and slide the cover 2 toward the rear of the server about 25 mm (1 inch).
Move the top edge of the cover out from the server; then, lift the cover off the
server. Set the cover aside.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the cover before turning on
the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (over 30 minutes)
with the cover removed might damage server components.
48
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Removing the cover (rack model)
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 44.
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.
1 Top cover
2 Side latches
3 Cover-release latch
To remove the server top cover:
1. If you are planning to install or remove any part other than a hot-swap hard
disk drive, hot-plug adapter, hot-swap power supply, or hot-swap fan, turn off
the server and all attached devices and disconnect all external cables and
power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 46).
2. Release the left and right side latches 2 and pull the server out of the rack
enclosure until both slide rails lock.
Note: When the server is in the locked position, you can easily reach the
cables on the back of the server.
3. Move the cover-release lever 3 down while sliding the top cover 1 toward
the rear of the server about 25 mm (1 inch). Lift the cover off the server and
set the cover aside.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the cover before turning on
the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (over 30 minutes)
with the cover removed might damage server components.
Chapter 4. Installing options
49
Removing the server door (tower model)
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the steps in this procedure.
1
CPU
VR
M
MEM
PC
I BU
ORY
HD
S
D
A
B
PO
W
ER
SU
1
2
3
FA
PP
LY
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURVI
S CE
NO
N
N
RED
1
PR
OC
UN
2
ES
DAN
3
TE
MPE
RAT
UR
SO
R
T
E
2
1 Flange
2 Server door
To remove the server door:
1. Unlock and open the server door 2.
2. Locate the flange 1 on the top edge of the door.
3. Press down on the flange while pressing out on the door; then lift the server
door up and off the hinge. Set the door aside in a safe place.
50
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Removing the trim bezel
Refer to the following illustrations while you perform the steps in this procedure.
Tower model
CP
U
VR
M
MEM
PC
I BU
ORY
HD
S
D
A
B
PO
W
NM
SM
ER
SU
1
2
3
FA
PP
LY
NO
N
I
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
N
RE
1
2
PR
OCE
DU
ND
AN
3
TE
MPE
RA
TU
SS
2
OR
T
RE
3
1 Bezel-release lever
2 Trim bezel
3 Side with bezel tabs and slots
To remove the trim bezel:
1. Move the blue bezel-release lever 1 following the curve of the lever opening.
2. Lift the bezel tabs out of the slots 3 and pull the bezel 2 away from the
server front. Store the bezel in a safe place.
Chapter 4. Installing options
51
Rack model
1 Bezel-release lever
2 Trim bezel
3 Side with bezel tabs and slots
To remove the trim bezel:
1. Move the blue bezel-release lever 1 following the curve of the lever opening.
2. Lift the bezel tabs out of the slots 3 and pull the bezel 2 away from the
server front. Store the bezel in a safe place.
52
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Working with adapters
You can install up to five peripheral component interconnect (PCI) adapters in the
expansion connectors, called slots, on the system board of your server.
In three of the PCI slots, you can install a new PCI adapter or replace an existing
PCI adapter with the same type of adapter without turning off the server power and
restarting the system, if these features are supported by your operating system.
These slots are sometimes called Active PCI, hot-pluggable PCI, or hot-plug PCI
slots. The two remaining PCI slots support standard (non-hot-plug) PCI adapters.
PCI
Your server comes with a video controller. This video controller is an integrated
component on the system board. It is not in an expansion slot. The integrated
video controller has super video graphics array (SVGA) technology.
The integrated video controller is not removable. If you want to disable this
controller and use a video adapter instead, you can install a video adapter in an
expansion slot. When you install a video adapter, the server BIOS automatically
disables the integrated video controller.
The following illustration shows the location of the PCI expansion slots on the
system board.
1
2
3
4
5
Non-hot-plug 32-bit PCI slots 1 and 2 (on PCI bus A)
Hot-plug 64-bit PCI slots 3–5 (on PCI bus B)
Power LEDs for hot-swap slots
Internal Attention LEDs for hot-swap slots
External Attention LEDs for hot-swap slots
Chapter 4. Installing options
53
LEDs for hot-plug PCI slots
Each hot-plug PCI slot has three LEDs associated with it — two Attention LEDs
and one Power LED.
Power LED: This LED is on when the hot-plug PCI slot is active and has
power. An adapter must not be added to or removed from the PCI slot when
the Power LED is on. When this LED is off, the PCI slot is inactive and has no
power applied. An adapter can be installed when the Power LED for the PCI
slot is off. Refer to your operating system documentation to determine if it
supports hot-plug PCI adapters, and, if so, how to disable the hot-plug PCI slot.
Attention LEDs: Each hot-plug PCI slot has an Attention LED that is visible
from the rear of the server and one that can be seen from inside the server.
(The LEDs have the same meaning; they are duplicated to be visible from
outside or inside the server.) An Attention LED flashes approximately once per
second when it is on. The meaning of the Attention LEDs is defined by your
operating system. Refer to your operating system documentation to determine
if it supports hot-plug PCI adapters and, if so, what the Attention LEDs indicate.
The following table describes the LEDs:
54
Power LED
Attention LED
Description
On
Flashing
The adapter requires attention. Slot still has
power applied. Do not remove or install an
adapter in the slot. Refer to your operating
system documentation for instructions.
On
Off
Normal operation; no intervention is required.
Off
Flashing
The adapter requires intervention. Power is
removed from the slot. An adapter can be
removed or installed in the slot.
Off
Off
Power is removed from the slot. An adapter
can be removed or installed in the slot.
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Adapter considerations
Before you continue with the adapter-installation procedure:
Review the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions provided in this chapter. If you need
to change the switch or jumper settings on your adapter, follow the instructions
that come with the adapter documentation.
You can install full-length adapters in all expansion slots.
You can install hot-plug PCI adapters in PCI slots 3–5, if your operating system
supports this feature. Non-hot-plug PCI adapters can also be installed in these
slots.
Your server supports 5.0 V and universal PCI adapters; it does not support
3.3 V adapters.
Note: A universal PCI adapter supports both 3.3 V and 5.0 V operation.
Your server uses a rotational interrupt technique to configure PCI adapters.
Because of this technique, you can install a variety of PCI adapters that
currently do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
PCI slots 1 and 2 are on PCI bus A, and PCI slots 3–5 are on PCI bus B. Both
PCI buses are primary buses. The system scans PCI slots 1 through 5 to
assign system resources; then the system starts (boots) the PCI devices in the
following order, if the default boot precedence has not been changed: PCI
slots 1 and 2, system board SCSI devices, and then PCI slots 3 through 5.
See “Start Options” on page 27 for information about changing the boot
precedence.
Note: The performance of the PCI adapters depends on the configuration of
adapters in your system.
Enabling hot-plug PCI support
Your server has hot-plug PCI capability. In order to enable this feature, you must
install the operating system services for hot-plug PCI support code. You can obtain
the operating system hot-plug PCI support code from
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support on the World Wide Web.
IO-compliant statement
I2O is a new standard architecture for intelligent I/O that offloads low-level interrupts
from the server processor to input/output processors (IOPs) designed specifically to
handle I/O. I2O-compliant adapters can improve I/O performance in high-bandwidth
applications, such as client/server processing, video, and groupware.
The xSeries 240 is intended to support I2O-compliant (deep) adapters as listed in
the ServerProven program. A deep adapter is a PCI card that has an embedded
input/output processor (IOP). For the deep adapter to function correctly, the
following items are needed:
An operating system service module (OSM), provided by an operating system
vendor, that supports the class of adapter (such as storage) that is being
installed in the server.
A hardware device module (HDM), provided by a PCI-card vendor.
Chapter 4. Installing options
55
Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter
Attention: All hot-plug operations must be done through the operating system
console (or supported user interface). Otherwise, the system might lock up or
serious damage to the adapter or system unit might occur.
This section contains the procedure for installing a hot-plug PCI adapter. If you
want to remove a hot-plug adapter, reverse the steps. If your operating system
supports hot-replace PCI adapters, you can replace a failing hot-plug PCI adapter
with a new adapter of the same type without turning off power to the server. If your
operating system and adapter also support the hot-add feature, you can install a
new adapter without turning off the power to the server.
Note: You do not need to turn off the server to install or remove a hot-plug PCI
adapter.
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 44.
Read the documentation that comes with your adapter for any special
requirements or restrictions.
Read the documentation that comes with your operating system.
Attention: Do not remove a hot-plug adapter before performing the
operating-system-defined procedure for disabling the hot-plug PCI slot that contains
the adapter. Failure to do so might cause your system to lock up. Refer to your
operating system documentation.
56
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Refer to the following illustrations of the rack model while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
Chapter 4. Installing options
57
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Expansion-slot cover
Tab
Adapter retention latch
Adapter retention flap
Plastic divider
Power light
Attention light
Adapter
SCSI cable extender
Note: For some server models, the SCSI cable extender differs slightly from what
is shown in the preceding illustration. In these models the retaining bracket
holding the cable connector has been removed.
To install a hot-plug PCI adapter:
1. Remove the cover. See “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on
page 48 or “Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 49.
2. Determine which PCI adapter expansion slot you will use for the adapter.
Note: You can use only PCI slots 3–5 hot-plug PCI adapters.
3. Disable the selected PCI slot from your operating system. (Refer to the
documentation that comes with your operating system for information about
disabling a hot-plug PCI slot.) Disabling the PCI slot turns off the Power light
for that PCI slot.
Attention: Make sure the Power light 6 for the hot-plug PCI slot is off before
you continue to the next step.
4. Remove the expansion-slot cover 1:
a. Rotate the adapter retention latch 3 counterclockwise.
58
IBM xSeries User's Reference
b. Lift the tab 2 covering the top of the expansion-slot cover 1 and then
remove the expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in a safe place
for future use.
Attention: Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots.
This maintains the electromagnetic emissions characteristics of the system
and ensures proper cooling of system components.
5. Refer to the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling
instructions. It might be easier for you to route any cables before you install
the adapter.
6. Press on the touchpoint on the adapter retainer flap 4 at the end of the slot
nearest the front of the server and rotate the adapter retainer flap upward.
7. Remove the adapter from the static-protective package.
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the
adapter.
8. Place the adapter, component-side up, on a flat, static-protective surface.
9. Install the adapter 8:
a. Carefully grasp the adapter 8 by its top edge or upper corners, and align
it with the expansion slot on the system board.
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention: When you install an adapter in the server, be sure that it is
completely and correctly seated in the system-board connector. Incomplete
insertion might cause damage to the system board or the adapter.
c. Lower the tab 2 on the adapter guide over the tab on the top corner of
adapter. Rotate the adapter retention latch 3 clockwise until it snaps into
place.
Attention: Power cannot be restored to the adapter slot if the tab is not
lowered into place.
d. Close the adapter retainer flap 4.
10. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
Attention: Route cables so that the flow of air from the fans is not blocked.
11. Enable the PCI slot from your operating system. (Refer to the documentation
that comes with your operating system for information about enabling a
hot-plug PCI slot.) Make sure that the Power light 6 for the hot-plug PCI slot
is on.
12. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 85.
Chapter 4. Installing options
59
Installing a non-hot-plug adapter
This section contains the procedure for installing a non-hot-plug adapter. If you
want to remove a non-hot-plug adapter, reverse the steps.
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 44.
Read the documentation that comes with your option.
Refer to the illustrations in “Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter” on page 56 while you
perform the steps in this procedure.
To install a non-hot-plug adapter:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables
and power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 46); then, remove
the cover. See “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on page 48 or
“Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 49.
2. Determine which PCI adapter expansion slot you will use for the adapter.
Note: Check the instructions that come with the adapter for any requirements
or restrictions.
3. Remove the expansion-slot cover 1:
a. Rotate the adapter retention latch 3 counterclockwise.
b. Remove the expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in a safe place
for future use.
Attention: Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots. This
maintains the electromagnetic emissions characteristics of the system and
ensures proper cooling of system components.
4. Refer to the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling
instructions. It might be easier for you to route any cables before you install
the adapter.
5. Press on the touchpoint on the adapter retainer flap 4 at the end of the slot
nearest the front of the server and rotate the adapter retainer flap upward.
6. Remove the adapter from the static-protective package.
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the
adapter.
7. Place the adapter, component-side up, on a flat, static-protective surface.
8. Set any jumpers or switches as described by the adapter manufacturer.
9. Install the adapter 8:
a. Carefully grasp the adapter 8 by its top edge or upper corners, and align
it with the expansion slot on the system board.
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention: When you install an adapter in the server, be sure that it is
completely and correctly seated in the system-board connector before you
60
IBM xSeries User's Reference
apply power. Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system
board or the adapter.
c. Lower the tab 2 on the adapter guide over the tab on the top corner of
the adapter. Rotate the adapter retention latch 3 clockwise until it snaps
into place.
d. Close the adapter retainer flap 4.
10. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
Attention: Route cables so that the flow of air from the fans is not blocked.
11. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 85.
Special considerations for installing a RAID adapter
You can install an optional RAID adapter in your server to control the hot-swap
hard disk drives.
To install the RAID adapter:
1. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the SCSI cable extender on the system board.
See the illustration in “Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter” on page 56 for the
location of the SCSI cable extender. (The other end of the SCSI cable is
connected to the SCSI hard disk drive (HDD) backplane.) The Service label on
the inside of the cover of your server shows cable routing for an optional RAID
adapter.
2. Connect the end of the SCSI cable that you disconnected from the SCSI cable
extender to the RAID adapter. The other end of the cable is connected to the
SCSI HDD backplane; the drives in the hot-swap bays are now connected to
the RAID adapter.
3. Connect the 2-drop SCSI cable to the SCSI cable extender on the system
board, and attach the device in the non-hot-swap bay to one of the drops on
the other end of the 2-drop SCSI cable. The device is attached to the
integrated SCSI controller.
Refer to the documentation provided with the RAID adapter for more information
about installing the adapter and configuring a disk array.
Verifying compatibility between network adapters and device drivers
Your server supports several types of network adapters. If you are having trouble
with the installation or operation of a network adapter or network operating system,
ensure that the network-adapter device driver supports up to four processors.
Refer to your network-adapter documentation for additional information about
adapter compatibility requirements.
Chapter 4. Installing options
61
Installing a microprocessor kit
Your server comes with one microprocessor installed on the processor board. If
you install an additional microprocessor kit, your server can operate as a symmetric
multiprocessing (SMP) server. With SMP, certain operating systems and
application programs can distribute the processing load between the
microprocessors. This enhances performance for database and point-of-sale
applications, integrated manufacturing solutions, and other applications.
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 44.
Thoroughly review the documentation that comes with the microprocessor,
so that you can determine whether you need to update the server basic
input/output system (BIOS). The latest level of BIOS for your server is
available through the World Wide Web. See Chapter 7, “Getting help,
service, and information” on page 161 for the appropriate World Wide Web
addresses.
Obtain an SMP-capable operating system (optional). For a list of supported
operating systems, see http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat/ on the World
Wide Web.
Attention: To avoid damage and ensure proper server operation when you install
a new or an additional microprocessor, use microprocessors that have the same
cache size and type, and the same clock speed. Microprocessor internal and
external clock frequencies must be identical.
Notes:
1. The illustrations in this section might differ slightly from your hardware.
2. To order additional microprocessor options, contact your IBM reseller or IBM
marketing representative.
3. The microprocessor that is installed in microprocessor connector U5 is CPU or
processor 1. If a microprocessor is installed in microprocessor connector U6, it
is CPU or processor 2. If the server has only one microprocessor installed, that
microprocessor is installed in microprocessor connector U5 and is the startup
(boot) processor. If more than one microprocessor is installed, the
microprocessor with the lower stepping level is the startup processor, and the
microprocessor with the higher stepping level is the application processor. If
both microprocessors have the same stepping level, the microprocessor
installed in microprocessor connector U6 is the startup processor, and the
microprocessor installed in U5 is the application processor.
Note: You can determine the stepping levels of the installed microprocessors
using the Configuration/Setup. See “System Summary” on page 22.
62
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Refer to the following illustrations while you perform the steps in this section.
6
5
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Terminator card
Microprocessor connector 2 (U6)
Voltage regulator module (VRM) connector for second VRM
VRM for first microprocessor (VRM 1)
Microprocessor connector 1 (U5)
Microprocessor 1
Chapter 4. Installing options
63
7 Microprocessor handle
8 Microprocessor 2
9 VRM for second microprocessor (VRM 2)
To install an additional microprocessor kit:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables
and power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 46); then, remove
the cover (see “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on page 48 or
“Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 49.)
2. Remove the terminator card 1 from the microprocessor connector 2. Store
the terminator card in a safe place in the static-protective package that your
new microprocessor is shipped in; you will need to install it again if you ever
remove the microprocessor.
3. Install the microprocessor:
a. Touch the static-protective package containing the new microprocessor to
any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the
microprocessor from the package.
b. Center the microprocessor 8 over the microprocessor connector 2 and
carefully press the microprocessor into the connector.
4. Install the VRM 9 included in the microprocessor kit:
Attention: When installing or replacing a VRM, use only VRMs specified for
use with your server. Use of other VRMs might cause your server to overheat.
a. Center the VRM 9 over the VRM connector 3. Make sure that the
VRM is oriented and aligned correctly.
b. Press the VRM into the connector.
Notes:
1) To remove a microprocessor, pull upward on the microprocessor
handle 7.
2) If you remove the microprocessor later, remember to install the
terminator card in the appropriate microprocessor connector and to
remove the VRM for that microprocessor.
5. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 85.
64
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Installing memory-module kits
Adding memory to your server is an easy way to make programs run faster. You
can increase the amount of memory in your server by installing options called
memory-module kits. Each kit contains one industry-standard, dual-inline memory
module (DIMM). Your server uses a noninterleaved memory configuration.
Your server comes with a DIMM installed on the processor board in DIMM
connector 4 (J1). You must install the largest DIMM in the memory connector
farthest from the microprocessor (DIMM connector 4). If you install two DIMMs,
you must install the second one in the memory connector closest to the
microprocessor (DIMM connector 1). If you install three DIMMs, you must install
the third one in DIMM connector 2. If you install four DIMMs, you must install the
fourth one in DIMM connector 3.
Note: The size of the DIMMs in the other memory connectors (DIMM connectors
1, 2, and 3) does not matter. Refer to the following table for some typical
memory configurations.
Table 3. Typical memory configurations
DIMM 4
DIMM 3
DIMM 2
512 MB
DIMM 1
128 MB
512 MB
256 MB
128 MB
512 MB
512 MB
256 MB
512 MB
512 MB
512 MB
512 MB
512 MB
Note: Your server supports 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB DIMMs. Your
server supports a minimum of 128 MB and a maximum of 4 GB of system
memory. Only 133 MHz, 3.3 V, 168-pin, 8-byte, 72-bit registered,
synchronous-dynamic-random-access memory (SDRAM), error correcting
code (ECC) with x4 configuration DIMM memory complying with PC 133
Registered DIMM Specification, Revision 1.0 or later is supported. When
installed in systems using 100 MHz front-side bus processors, the memory
operates at 100 MHz.
5
4
3
Chapter 4. Installing options
65
1
2
3
4
5
6
DIMM
Retaining clips
DIMM connector
DIMM connector
DIMM connector
DIMM connector
1
2
3
4
(J4)
(J3)
(J2)
(J1)
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 44.
Read the documentation that comes with your option.
To install a DIMM:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables
and power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 46); then remove
the cover. See “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on page 48 or
“Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 49.
2. Locate the DIMM connectors on the processor board. Determine the DIMM
connector into which you will install the DIMM. (See the notes at the beginning
of this procedure.)
3. Touch the static-protective package containing the DIMM to any unpainted
metal surface on the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the package.
Note: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM connectors,
handle the clips gently.
4. Install the DIMM:
a. Turn the DIMM 1 so that the pins align correctly with the connector 5.
b. Insert the DIMM into the connector by pressing on one edge of the DIMM
and then on the other edge of the DIMM. Be sure to press straight into the
connector. Be sure that the retaining clips 2 snap into the closed
positions.
c. Make sure the retaining clips are in the closed position. If a gap exists
between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM has not been properly
installed. In this case, open the retaining clips and remove the DIMM; then,
reinsert the DIMM.
d. Repeat these steps for each DIMM that you install.
Attention:
Installing or removing DIMMs changes the configuration information in the
server. When you restart the server, the system displays a message indicating
that the memory configuration has changed.
If you installed additional memory, start the Configuration/Setup Utility
program and select Save Settings.
If you just replaced a failed DIMM, you must start the Configuration/Setup
Utility program, select Advanced Setup, select Memory Settings, highlight
the connector or bank of connectors that you want to enable, then select
Enable.
66
IBM xSeries User's Reference
In some memory configurations, the 3-3-3 beep code might sound during
POST followed by a blank display screen. If this occurs and the Boot Fail
Count feature in the Start Options of the Configuration/Setup Utility is set
to Enabled (its default setting), you must restart the server three times to
force the system BIOS to reset the memory connector or bank of
connectors from Disabled to Enabled.
5. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 85.
Installing internal drives
Different types of drives allow your system to read multiple types of media and
store more data. Several types of drives are available, such as:
Diskette
Hard disk
CD-ROM
Tape
Internal drive bays
Internal drives are installed in bays. Your server comes with one 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB
diskette drive and one CD-ROM drive.
Tower model
1 Diskette drive bay
2 SCSI ID 0 bay
3 SCSI ID 2 bay
4 SCSI ID 3 bay
5 SCSI ID 4 bay
6 SCSI ID 8 bay
7 SCSI ID 9 bay
8 Hot-swap bays
9 CD-ROM drive bay
1 Non-hot-swap bay B
11 Non-hot-swap bay A
Chapter 4. Installing options
67
Rack model
1 Hot-swap bays
2 CD-ROM drive bay
3 Non-hot-swap bay B
4 Non-hot-swap bay A
5 Diskette drive bay B
6 SCSI ID 9 bay
7 SCSI ID 5 bay
8 SCSI ID 4 bay
9 SCSI ID 3 bay
1 SCSI ID 1 bay
11 SCSI ID 0 bay
Your server contains hardware that lets you replace a failed hard disk drive without
turning off the server. Therefore, you have the advantage of continuing to operate
your system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed. These drives are
known as hot-swappable drives. They are also referred to as hot-swap drives.
Each hot-swap drive that you plan to install must have a hot-swap-drive tray
attached. The drive must have a single connector attachment (SCA) connector.
Hot-swap-drive trays come with the hot-swap drives.
Your server comes with a preinstalled 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB diskette drive and a
preinstalled IDE CD-ROM drive.
Bays A and B come without a device installed. These bays are for 5.25-inch,
half-high, removable-media drives, such as tape backup drives. Bays A and B
can be combined into a single full-high bay.
Your server supports only one diskette drive.
Note: The EMI integrity and cooling of the server are both protected by having
bays A and B covered or occupied. When you install a drive, save the
filler panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive and do not
replace it with another.
If you are installing a device with a 50-pin connector in one of the non-hot-swap
bays (bays A and B), you need a 68-pin to 50-pin converter. To order the
converter, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
Your server supports six slim (1-inch) or three half-high (1.6-inch), 3.5-inch
hot-swap hard disk drives in the hot-swap bays.
The hot-swap bays connect to a SCSI backplane. This backplane is the
printed circuit board behind the bay. The backplane supports up to six hard
disk drives.
The diskette drive uses 1 MB and 2 MB diskettes. For optimum use,
format 1 MB diskettes to 720 KB and format 2 MB diskettes to 1.44 MB.
68
IBM xSeries User's Reference
SCSI drives
Some drives have a special design called small computer system interface, or
SCSI. This design allows you to attach multiple drives to a single SCSI channel.
Notes:
1. Any information about SCSI drives also applies to other SCSI devices, such as
tape drives.
2. If you plan to install both internal and external SCSI devices, you must follow
the instructions in “Connecting external options” on page 90, in addition to the
instructions in this section.
A 16-bit (wide) SCSI cable connects the SCSI HDD (hard disk drive) backplane to
an integrated SCSI controller on the system board. An additional 16-bit 2-drop
SCSI cable is shipped, disconnected, inside your server. It is folded and restrained
with a cable clamp to the side of the power supply housing.
If you want to install a device in one of the non-hot-swap bays, you can either:
Install an additional SCSI adapter and use the 2-drop SCSI cable to attach the
device to that adapter.
Install a RAID adapter as follows:
1. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the SCSI cable extender on the system
board. See the illustration in “Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter” on page 56
for the location of the SCSI cable extender. (The other end of the SCSI
cable is connected to the SCSI HDD backplane.)
2. Connect the end of the SCSI cable that you disconnected from the SCSI
cable extender to the RAID adapter. The other end of the cable is
connected to the SCSI HDD backplane; the drives in the hot-swap bays are
now connected to the RAID adapter.
3. Connect the 2-drop SCSI cable to the SCSI cable extender on the system
board, and attach the device in the non-hot-swap bay to one of the drops
on the other end of the 2-drop SCSI cable. The device is attached to the
integrated SCSI controller.
SCSI IDs
Each SCSI device that is connected to an individual channel of a SCSI controller
needs a unique identification (ID) so that the controller can identify the devices and
ensure that different devices do not attempt to transfer data at the same time. If
you need to set IDs for SCSI devices, refer to the instructions that come with those
devices.
Your server automatically sets SCSI IDs for hot-swap hard disk drives. The SCSI
ID assigned to each hot-swap bay is shown on your server beside the bay and in
the illustrations in “Internal drive bays” on page 67. The server uses the hard disk
drive SCSI IDs to send status information to the indicator lights above each
hot-swap bay.
The SCSI backplane in the server supports up to six hot-swap bays.
The processing sequence for SCSI devices proceeds from the lowest SCSI ID to
the highest (0 to 6, then 8 to 15).
Chapter 4. Installing options
69
Termination (internal SCSI devices)
SCSI buses must be terminated at each end. The ends of the SCSI buses in your
server are already terminated.
All the hot-swap drives in your server have automatic termination, and the SCSI
controller provides termination at the other end of the SCSI bus.
You must disable termination on any SCSI devices that you install in the
non-hot-swap bays. Refer to the information that come with the SCSI device for
instructions about setting device jumpers or switches that control termination.
Preinstallation steps (all bays)
Before you install drives in your server, verify that you have all the cables and any
other equipment specified in the documentation that comes with the internal drive.
You might also need to perform certain preinstallation activities. Some of the steps
are required only during the initial installation of an option.
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 44.
Read the documentation that comes with the internal drive.
1. Choose the bay in which you want to install the drive.
2. Check the instructions that come with the drive to see if you need to set any
switches or jumpers on the drive.
3. To install the drive, go to “Installing a non-hot-swap drive” on page 71 or
“Installing a drive in a hot-swap bay” on page 73.
70
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Installing a non-hot-swap drive
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 44.
Read the documentation that comes with your drive.
Prepare the drive for installation (see “Preinstallation steps (all bays)” on
page 70).
Note: The EMI integrity and cooling of the server are both protected by having the
non-hot-swap bays covered or occupied. When you install a drive, save the
filler panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive and do not
replace it with another.
Refer to the following illustration of the tower model while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
1
2
3
4
Digital linear tape (DLT) drive
Filler panel
Blue slide rails
Metal slide rails
Chapter 4. Installing options
71
To install a non-hot-swap drive in one of the non-hot-swap bays:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices (see “Preparing to install options” on
page 46) and then remove the cover. See “Removing the left-side cover
(tower model)” on page 48 or “Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 49.
2. Remove the trim bezel. (See “Removing the trim bezel” on page 51.)
3. Remove the filler panel 2 from the bay opening by pulling the filler panel
away from the server. You do not need the filler panel when you have a drive
installed in the bay.
4. Touch the static-protective bag containing the drive to any unpainted metal
surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the bag and place it on a
static-protective surface.
5. Set any jumpers or switches on the drive according to the documentation that
comes with the drive.
6. Install rails on the drive.
If you are installing a standard-size drive:
a. Pull the blue slide rails 3 off the back of the filler panel.
b. Clip the rails onto the sides of the drive.
If you are installing a digital linear tape (DLT) backup drive 1, the slide
rails 4 and screws are included in the box with your server
documentation.
7. Place the drive so that the slide rails engage in the bay guide rails. Push the
drive into the bay until it clicks into place.
8. If you have not already done so, install an optional SCSI adapter. (See to
“Working with adapters” on page 53 for information about installing an
adapter.) See “SCSI drives” on page 69 for information about optional SCSI
adapters, installation of drives in the non-hot-swap bays, and the 16-bit 2-drop
SCSI cable that is provided for use with optional SCSI adapters.
9. Connect one of the connectors on the SCSI cable for the non-hot-swap drive
bays to the back of the drive 1.
10. Connect a power cable to the back of the drive. Power cables for
non-hot-swap drives come installed in your server. The connectors are keyed
and can be inserted only one way.
11. If you are installing another non-hot-swap drive, do so at this time. Otherwise,
continue with the next step.
12. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 85.
72
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Installing a drive in a hot-swap bay
The hot-swap drive bays support hot-swap drives only.
This section contains the procedure for installing a hot-swap hard disk drive. If you
want to remove a drive, reverse the following steps.
Notes:
1. To minimize the possibility of damage to the hard disk drives when you are
installing a hard disk drive in a rack model, install the rack model in the rack
before installing the hard disk drives.
2. You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in these bays.
However, you must turn off the server when performing any steps that involve
installing or removing cables.
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 44.
Read the documentation that comes with your drive.
If your server has a RAID adapter installed, review the documentation that
comes with your RAID adapter for information about the RAID adapter and
disk-array configuration.
Prepare the drive for installation (see “Preinstallation steps (all bays)” on
page 70).
Refer to the following illustrations of the tower model while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
Chapter 4. Installing options
73
1 Filler panel for use with half-high drives
2 Filler panel (slim-high)
HD
D
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
NO
N
PR
OC
ES
SO
R
RED
UN
DA
NT
TE
MPE
RAT
UR
E
3
4
5
6
74
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Drive
Screws
Drive tray
Drive tray handle (in open position)
To install a drive in a hot-swap drive bay:
1. If your server is a tower model, unlock and open the server door.
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for
more than two minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each
bay.
2. Remove the filler panel 2 from one of the empty hot-swap bays by inserting
your finger into the depression at the left side of the filler panel and pulling it
away from the server.
Note: If you are installing a half-high hard disk drive, you will need to remove
two adjacent filler panels. The two filler panels should be from either
the top pair of bays, the middle pair of bays, or the bottom pair of bays.
3. If your hard disk drive is not installed on the drive tray 5, place the drive in
the drive tray and, being careful not to over-tighten the screws, attach the drive
to the tray using the four screws provided with the option kit.
4. Install the hard disk drive 3 in the hot-swap bay:
a. Ensure the tray handle 6 is open (that is, perpendicular to the drive).
b. Align the drive/tray assembly so that it engages the guide rails in the bay.
c. Gently push the drive/tray assembly into the bay until the drive connects to
the backplane.
d. Push the tray handle to the right until it locks.
5. If you installed a half-high hard disk drive, install a filler panel 1 in the gap
above the drive:
a. Locate the smaller filler panel 1 that is designed for use with half-high
drives. It is stored on the slim-high filler panel 2 that you removed earlier
in this procedure.
b. Pull the smaller filler panel off the filler panel.
c. Gently push the filler panel 1 into place in the gap above the drive.
6. Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify that the hard disk drives
are operating properly. See “Identifying problems using status LEDs” on
page 151 for details.
7. If your server is a tower model, close and lock the server door.
Note: If your server has a RAID adapter installed, you must reconfigure your
disk arrays after installing hard disk drives.
Chapter 4. Installing options
75
Replacing a drive in a hot-swap bay
You do not have to turn off the server to remove a drive from a hot-swap bay.
Attention:
1. Before you remove a hot-swap hard disk drive that is not defective, back up all
important data.
2. To avoid damage to a hard disk drive, Do not remove the drive from the
hot-swap bay until it has had time to spin down (approximately 30 seconds).
Handle the drive carefully.
3. Before you remove a hot-swap drive, make sure it is defective. If you partially
or completely remove a good drive instead of a defective one your server might
lose valuable data.
This situation is especially relevant if your server has a RAID adapter installed
and you assigned RAID level 1 or 5 to the logical drives in your disk array. The
RAID adapter can rebuild the data that you need, provided that certain
conditions are met. Refer to the information provided with the RAID adapter for
further details.
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 44.
Read the documentation that comes with your drive.
If your server has a RAID adapter installed, review the information provided
with the RAID adapter for information about the RAID adapter and
disk-array configuration.
Prepare the drive for installation (see “Preinstallation steps (all bays)” on
page 70).
76
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Refer to the following illustration of the tower model while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
HD
D
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
NO
N
PR
OC
ES
SO
R
RED
UN
DA
NT
TE
MPE
RAT
UR
E
3
4
5
6
Drive
Screws
Drive tray
Drive tray handle (in open position)
Chapter 4. Installing options
77
To replace a drive in a hot-swap bay:
1. If your server is a tower model, unlock and open the server door.
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for
more than two minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each
bay.
2. Remove the defective hard disk drive 3 by placing the handle 6 on the
drive to the open position (perpendicular to the drive) and pulling the hot-swap
tray from the bay.
3. Remove the four screws 4 that attach the drive 3 to the hot-swap tray 5,
and remove the drive from the tray.
4. Place the new hard disk drive on the hot-swap tray and, being careful not to
over-tighten the screws, attach the drive to the tray using four screws.
5. Install the hard disk drive in the hot-swap bay:
a. Ensure the tray handle is open (that is, perpendicular to the drive).
b. Align the drive/tray assembly so that it engages the guide rails in the bay.
c. Push the drive assembly into the bay until the drive connects to the
backplane.
d. Push the tray handle to the right until it locks.
6. Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify that the hard disk drive is
installed properly. See “Identifying problems using status LEDs” on page 151
for details.
7. If your server is a tower model, close and lock the server door.
78
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Installing a hot-swap power supply
Your server comes with two power supplies. You can add a third power supply.
After you install a power supply, check the power-supply status indicators to verify
that the power supply is operating properly. See “Power supplies” on page 13 for
details.
8
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the
following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts
inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these
parts, contact a service technician.
Chapter 4. Installing options
79
Refer to the following illustration of the tower model while performing the steps in
this procedure.
Note: You do not need to turn off the power to the server to install hot-swap
power supplies.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
80
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Power supply
Filler panel
Cable-restraint bracket
Power cord connector
Handle on power supply (in open position)
AC Power light
DC Power light
To add a power supply:
1. Remove the filler panel 2 from the empty power supply bay by inserting your
finger into the depression on the filler panel and pulling it away from the server.
Save the filler panel in case you remove the power supply at a later time.
Note: During normal operation, each power-supply bay must have either a
power supply or filler panel installed for proper cooling.
2. Install the power supply 1 in the bay:
a. Place the handle 5 on the power supply in the open position (that is,
perpendicular to the power supply) and slide the power supply into the
chassis.
b. Gently close the handle to seat the power supply in the bay.
3. Plug the power cord for the added power supply into the power cord connector
2.
4. Route the power cord through the cable-restraint bracket 3.
5. Plug the power cord into a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6. Verify that the DC Power light 7 and AC Power light 6 on the power supply
are lit, indicating that the power supply is operating correctly.
7. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 85.
Removing a hot-swap power supply
Your server comes with two power supplies. You can add a third power supply.
Each power supply has two status indicators; see “Power supplies” on page 13 for
information about the status indicators.
Attention: If the NON REDUNDANT LED on the diagnostic LED panel is lit, do
not remove a hot-swap power supply without first turning off the server.
Refer to the illustration in “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page 79 while
you perform the steps in this procedure.
8
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the
following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts
inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these
parts, contact a service technician.
Chapter 4. Installing options
81
To remove a hot-swap power supply:
1. If the NON REDUNDANT LED on the diagnostic LED panel is lit, turn off the
server and peripheral devices (see “Preparing to install options” on page 46);
otherwise, go to the next step.
2. Remove the power supply 1:
a. Unplug the power cord connector from the power supply.
Note: Be careful when you remove the hot-swap power supply; the power
supply might be too hot to handle comfortably.
12
CAUTION:
The following label indicates a hot surface nearby.
b. Remove the defective power supply by placing the handle 5 on the power
supply in the open position (perpendicular to the power supply) and pulling
the power supply from the bay.
3. If you are not replacing the power supply:
a. Install a power-supply filler panel 2.
Note: During normal operation, each power-supply bay must have either a
power supply or filler panel installed for proper cooling.
b. Open the cable-restraint bracket 3 and remove the power cord from the
cable-restraint bracket. Close the cable-restraint bracket.
c. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
If you are replacing the power supply:
a. Place the handle 5 on the power supply in the open position, and slide
the power supply into the chassis.
b. Gently close the handle on the power supply to seat the power supply in
the bay.
c. Plug the power cord for the power supply into the power cord connector
4.
4. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 85.
82
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly
Your server comes with three hot-swap fan assemblies.
Attention: Replace a fan that has failed within 48 hours to help ensure proper
cooling.
Note: You do not need to turn off the power to the server to replace a hot-swap
fan assembly.
The following illustrations show the replacement of a hot-swap fan assembly. Refer
to these illustrations while performing the steps in this procedure.
CPU
HDD
VRM
MEMORY
PCI BUS
NMI
A
B
POWER
1
SMI
SUPPLY
2
3
2
3
SERVICE
PROCESSO
BUS
R
NON REDU
NDANT
FAN
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TEMPERATU
RE
Hot-swap fan assembly 1
Fan assembly 1 LED
Fan 1 release latch
Hot-swap fan assembly 2
Fan assembly 2 LED
Fan 2 release latch
Fan Assembly 3 LED
Fan 3 release latch
Hot-swap fan assembly 3
Chapter 4. Installing options
83
To replace a hot-swap fan assembly:
1. Remove the cover. See “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on
page 48 or “Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 49.
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, do not remove the top cover for
more than 30 minutes during this procedure.
2. Determine which fan assembly (fan 1 1, fan 2 4, or fan 3 9) to replace by
checking the fan LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel (see “Diagnostic LED
panel” on page 153) and the LEDs located on the fan assemblies.
3. Remove the fan assembly from the server by pressing the orange release latch
(3, 6, or 8) for the fan and pulling the fan away from the server.
4. Slide the replacement fan assembly into the server until it clicks into place.
5. Verify that the FAN LED on the diagnostic panel is not lit. If the FAN LED is lit,
reseat the fan.
6. Replace the cover. For a tower model, see “Completing the tower model
installation” on page 85. For a rack model, see “Completing the rack model
installation” on page 88.
84
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Completing the installation
To complete your installation, you must reinstall the cover and reconnect all the
cables that you disconnected in “Preparing to install options” on page 46, and, for
certain options, run the Configuration/Setup Utility program. Follow the instructions
in this section.
If you have a tower model, continue with “Completing the tower model
installation.”
If you have a rack model, go to “Completing the rack model installation” on
page 88.
Completing the tower model installation
To complete the installation for the tower model:
1. Install the left-side cover, if it was removed.
CP
U
VR
M
ME
MO
PC
RY
I BU
S
A
B
PO
WE
R
1
2
SU
PP
LY
3
FA
N
HD
D
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
NO
N
1
2
3
PR
OC
ES
SO
R
RE
DU
ND
AN
T
TE
MP
ER
AT
UR
E
1 Slots
2 Left-side cover
a. Align the left-side cover 2 with the left side of the server, about 25 mm
(1 inch) from the front of the server; place the bottom of the left-side cover
on the bottom rail of the left-side side of the chassis.
b. Insert the tabs at the top of the cover into the slots 1 at the top of the
server side.
c. Hold the cover against the server and slide the cover toward the front of
the server until the cover clicks into place.
Chapter 4. Installing options
85
2. Install the trim bezel, if it was removed.
CP
U
VR
M
MEM
PC
I BU
ORY
HD
S
D
A
B
PO
W
NM
SM
ER
SU
1
2
3
FA
PP
LY
NO
N
I
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
N
RE
1
2
PR
OCE
DU
ND
AN
3
TE
MPE
RA
TU
SS
OR
T
RE
1 Trim bezel
2 Slots (hidden by bezel)
a. Place the tabs at the bottom edge of the trim bezel 1 in the slots 2 at
the bottom front of the server.
b. Press the top of the bezel toward the server until the bezel clicks into
place.
86
IBM xSeries User's Reference
3. Install the server door, if it was removed.
1 Flange
2 Server door
a. Set the door 2 on the bottom hinge.
b. Press the flange 1 downward while pressing the top of the door toward
the server, until the flange connects with the top hinge. Release the flange.
4. Close and lock the server door.
Attention: Be sure to maintain a clearance of at least 127 mm (5 inches) on
the front and rear of the server to allow for air circulation.
5. If you disconnected any cables from the back of the server, reconnect the
cables; then, plug the power cords into properly grounded electrical outlets.
Note: If necessary, see “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on
page 11 for connector locations.
6. Restart your server.
7. Update device records and reconfigure your server (see “Updating device
records and reconfiguring the server” on page 90).
Chapter 4. Installing options
87
Completing the rack model installation
To complete the installation for the rack model:
1. Install the top cover, if it was removed.
1 Top cover
2 Side latches
3 Flanges
a. Align the top cover 1 with the top of the server, about 25 mm (1 inch) from
the front of the server; the flanges on the left and right sides of the cover
should be on the outside of the server chassis.
b. Hold the cover against the server and slide the cover toward the front of
the server until the cover clicks into place.
88
IBM xSeries User's Reference
2. Install the trim bezel, if it was removed.
1 Bezel-release lever
2 Trim bezel
3 Slots (hidden by bezel)
a. Place the tabs on the left side of the trim bezel in the slots 3 at the left
front of the server.
b. Press the right end of the bezel toward the server until the bezel clicks into
place.
3. If you disconnected any cables from the back of the server, reconnect the
cables; then, plug the power cords into properly grounded electrical outlets.
Note: If necessary, see “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on
page 11 for connector locations.
4. Slide the server into the rack enclosure until the side latches click into place.
5. Restart your server.
6. Update device records and reconfigure your server (see “Updating device
records and reconfiguring the server” on page 90).
Chapter 4. Installing options
89
Updating device records and reconfiguring the server
When you start your server for the first time after you add or remove an internal
option or an external SCSI device, you might see a message telling you that the
configuration has changed.
Some options have device drivers that you need to install. Refer to the
documentation that comes with your option for information about installing any
required device drivers.
If you have more than one microprocessor installed, you might want to upgrade
your operating system. Refer to ServerGuide topic. If you have installed or
removed hard disk drives and your server has a RAID adapter installed, refer to the
documentation provided with your RAID adapter for information about reconfiguring
your disk arrays.
Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to save the new configuration
information. See Chapter 3, “Configuring your server.”
Connecting external options
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 44.
Read the documentation that comes with your options.
Connecting external SCSI devices
You can attach a SCSI storage expansion enclosure to your server.
Cabling requirements
The SCSI controller in your server has one channel that can be used to attach
external devices. This channel is connected to the SCSI connector on the back of
the server and supports 14 unique SCSI IDs. To select and order the correct
cables for use with external devices, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
For information about the maximum length of SCSI cable between the terminated
ends of the cable, see ANSI SCSI Standards:
X3.131-1986 (SCSI)
X3.131-1994 (SCSI-2)
X3T10/1071D
Adhering to these standards ensures that your server operates properly.
Setting SCSI IDs for external devices
Each SCSI device that is connected to a SCSI controller must have a unique SCSI
ID, so that the SCSI controller can identify the devices and ensure that different
devices do not attempt to transfer data at the same time. SCSI devices that are
connected to different SCSI controllers can have duplicate SCSI IDs. The SCSI
controller uses one of the SCSI IDs; the default SCSI ID for the SCSI controller is
7. See “SCSI IDs” on page 69 and refer to the instructions that come with the
SCSI devices for more information about setting a SCSI ID.
90
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Installation procedure
To attach an external device:
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Follow the instructions that come with the option to prepare it for installation
and to connect it to the server.
Input/output ports and connectors
The input/output (I/O) connectors are for attaching external devices, such as
printers, keyboards, and displays, to your server. The I/O connectors on your
server include:
Two
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
Two
serial-port connectors
management port C connector
parallel-port connector
video-port connector
keyboard-port connector
auxiliary-device-port connector
SCSI connector
Ethernet-port connector
USB-port connectors
See the illustration in “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on page 11 for
the locations of the connectors.
Chapter 4. Installing options
91
Serial ports
Your server comes with two serial ports. (See “Input/output connectors and
expansion slots” on page 11 for the locations of the connectors.) These ports are
used to communicate with printers, plotters, external modems, scanners, and
auxiliary terminals. These ports also enable you to transfer data between
computers.
Serial ports can transfer data asynchronously, which means that they can transmit
any number of characters at any time, with no restriction on the duration of the
pauses between characters.
The serial ports can transmit and receive data and commands at rates of from 300
bits per second up to 115 000 bits per second.
Serial port A is shared by the operating system and the integrated Advanced
System Management Processor. Serial port B can be used only by the operating
system.
Each serial port has a 9-pin, male D-shell connector on the back of the server. The
pin-number assignments of this connector conform to the industry standard.
5
1
6
9
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the serial-port
connectors.
Table 4. Serial port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
Data carrier detect
Receive data
Transmit data
Data terminal ready
Signal ground
6
7
8
9
Data set ready
Request to send
Clear to send
Ring indicator
When you turn on your server, the POST routine assigns the serial ports to specific
communication port addresses.
Some application programs use only certain ports, and some modems are designed
for use only at certain communication port addresses. You might need to use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to change communication port address
assignments to resolve conflicts.
Management port C
Your server has a dedicated system-management I/O port. This port can be used
to attach a modem that is dedicated to communication with the Advanced System
Management Processor.
The connector on the back of the server and the pin-number assignments are the
same as for the serial ports.
92
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Parallel port
The parallel port usually is used to communicate with printers, and transfers data
one byte at a time. The parallel port has a 25-pin, female D-shell connector on the
back of your server. It supports three standard IEEE 1284 modes of operation:
Standard Parallel Port (SPP), Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP), and Extended
Capability Port (ECP). (See “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on
page 11 for the location of the connector.)
13
25
1
14
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the parallel-port
connector.
Table 5. Parallel port pin-number assignments
Pin
I/O
SPP/ECP Signal
EPP Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
O
-
−STROBE
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
−ACK
BUSY
PE (paper end)
SLCT (select)
−AUTO FD (feed)
−ERROR
−INIT
−SLCT IN
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
−WRITE
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
−ACK
−WAIT
PE (paper end)
SLCT (select)
−DSTRB
−ERROR
−INIT
−ASTRB
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
When you turn on your server, the POST routine assigns the parallel port a specific
port address. You can change the parallel-port assignment by using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program. See “Devices and I/O Ports” on page 22.
Chapter 4. Installing options
93
Video port
The system board in your server has one SVGA video port. This port is used to
attach a video monitor. The video port has a 15-pin analog connector on the back
of the server. (See “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on page 11 for
the location of the connector.)
5
1
15
11
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the video connector.
Table 6. Video port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Red
Green or monochrome
Blue
Monitor ID bit 2
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
+5 V dc
Ground
Monitor ID bit 0
DDC SDA
Horizontal synchronization (Hsync)
Vertical synchronization (Vsync)
DDC SCL
Keyboard port
The system board has one keyboard port. (See “Input/output connectors and
expansion slots” on page 11 for the location of the connector.)
6
5
4
3
2
1
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the connector used by
the keyboard port.
Table 7. Keyboard port pin-number assignments
94
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
Keyboard data
Mouse data
Ground
+5 V dc
Keyboard clock
Mouse clock
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Auxiliary-device (pointing device) port
The system board has one auxiliary-device port that supports a mouse or other
pointing device. (See “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on page 11 for
the location of the connector.)
6
5
4
3
2
1
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the connector used by
the auxiliary-device port.
Table 8. Auxiliary-device port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
Data
Not connected
Ground
+5 V dc
Clock
Not connected
Chapter 4. Installing options
95
SCSI ports
Your server comes with a low voltage differential (LVD) SCSI controller on the
system board, which provides two independent SCSI channels. A 16-bit (wide)
SCSI cable connects the hot-swap backplane to one channel of the integrated
low-voltage differential (LVD) SCSI controller. Another SCSI cable connects the
other channel of the controller to the SCSI connector on the rear of the server.
To attach an external SCSI device to your server, connect an external SCSI cable
from the SCSI device to the SCSI connector on the back of the server. Ensure that
the last device on the external SCSI cable is terminated.
34
1
68
35
Table 9 shows the pin-number assignments for the 68-pin SCSI connectors.
Table 9. 68-pin SCSI port connector pin-number assignments
96
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
+Data 12
+Data 13
+Data 14
+Data 15
+Data P1
+Data 0
+Data 1
+Data 2
+Data 3
+Data 4
+Data 5
+Data 6
+Data 7
+Data P
Ground
DIFFSENS
Terminator power
Terminated power
Reserved
Ground
+Attention
Ground
+Busy
+Acknowledge
+Reset
+Message
+Select
+Control/Data
+Request
+Input/Output
+Data 8
+Data 9
+Data 10
+Data 11
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
−Data 12
−Data 13
−Data 14
−Data 15
−Data P1
−Data 0
−Data 1
−Data 2
−Data 3
−Data 4
−Data 5
−Data 6
−Data 7
−Data P
Ground
Ground
Terminator power
Terminated power
Reserved
Ground
−Attention
Ground
−Busy
−Acknowledge
−Reset
−Message
−Select
−Control/Data
−Request
−Input/Output
−Data 8
−Data 9
−Data 10
−Data 11
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Ethernet port
The system board in your server contains an Ethernet controller. The controller
has an external RJ-45 connector on the rear of the server that is used with a
category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable. The connector enables an
Ethernet network to attach to the internal transceiver in your server.
Note: The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard requires that the cabling in the
network be Category 5 or higher.
See “Configuring the Ethernet controller” on page 35 for additional information
about the Ethernet controller.
Table 10 shows the pin-number assignments for the RJ-45 connector. These
assignments apply to both 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX devices.
10BASE-T or 100 BASE-TX
UTP Cable
1
2
RJ-45 Modular Plug Connector
3
Pins
6
Table 10. Ethernet port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
Transmit data+
Transmit data−
Receive data+
Reserved
5
6
7
8
Reserved
Receive data−
Reserved
Reserved
Chapter 4. Installing options
97
Universal Serial Bus ports
The system board in your server contains two Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports.
Each USB port has an external connector on the rear of the server for attaching
devices that previously used serial, parallel, keyboard, mouse, and game ports.
USB is an emerging serial interface standard for telephony and multimedia devices.
USB technology uses Plug and Play technology to determine what device is
attached to the connector. Each USB device is accessed by a unique USB
address. A device called a hub is used to convert the USB port into multiple
attachment points. A hub has multiple ports where peripherals can be attached.
USB provides 12 megabits-per-second (Mbps) bandwidth with a maximum of 63
peripherals and a maximum signal distance of five meters (16 ft) per segment.
Note: If more than one USB device is to be attached, the device must be
connected to a hub.
Table 11 shows the pin-number assignments for the USB connectors.
Table 11. USB port pin-number assignments
98
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
VCC
−Data
+Data
Ground
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Chapter 5. System board and processor board
This chapter contains information about the system board and processor board
component and switch locations. This section also provides the instructions
needed to change the jumper settings.
System-board component locations
The following illustration shows a layout of the system board and identifies
system-board components. You might need to refer to this figure before you install
hardware in your server.
1 Dual serial and PCI hot-plug control switch connector (J1)
2 Microprocessor board connector (J4, J8)
3 Operator information panel connector (J29)
4 Reserved (J32)
5 Reserved (J10)
6 Diskette drive connector (J23)
7 Diagnostic LED panel connector (J6)
8 Reserved (J17)
9 Internal LVD (low voltage differential) SCSI connector (J25) (with extender
cable on bracket)
1 PCI slots 1 and 2 (on primary PCI bus A)
11 IDE connector (J27)
12 Power control and reset panel cable connector (J18)
13 Advanced System Management Interconnect connector (J35)
14 Battery
15 PCI (hot-plug) slots 3–5 (on primary PCI bus B)
16 Jumper block (J20)
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
99
17 PCI slot Power Good LEDs
18 Internal PCI slot Attention LEDs
19 External PCI slot Attention LEDs
2 Advanced System Management adapter connector (J21)
21 External LVD SCSI/Parallel port connectors (J19)
22 Serial/video port connectors (J11)
23 USB 1 and USB 2 port connectors (J9) (USB 2 is below USB 1.)
24 Ethernet port connector (J7)
25 Mouse and keyboard connectors (J5) (The mouse connector is above the
keyboard connector.)
System-board jumpers
Table 12 describes the jumpers on the system board. The numbers in the table
correspond to the highlighted numbers on the illustration in “System-board
component locations” on page 99.
Note: Turn off the server, and disconnect the power cords before moving any
jumpers.
The following illustration shows pin positions for the system board jumper J20. Pin
1 is the pin at the upper-left corner of J20 in the illustration of the system board in
“System-board component locations” on page 99.
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
Table 12. System board jumper (J20)
100
Jumper pin positions
Description
Pins 1–3
The default is no jumper on pins 1, 2, and 3.
Pins 4–6
The default is a jumper on pins 4 and 5.
Pins 7–9
The default is a jumper on pins 8 and 9.
Pins 10–12
The default is a jumper on pins 10 and 11.
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Processor-board component locations
A layout of the processor board is shown in the following illustration.
1 DIMM connector 4 (J1)
2 DIMM connector 3 (J2)
3 DIMM connector 2 (J3)
4 DIMM connector 1 (J4)
5 Microprocessor 2 connector (U6)
6 Reserved (J15)
7 Microprocessor 2 Error LED (CR13)
8 Reserved (J19)
9 Power supply connector (J6)
1 Power supply connector (J11)
11 Power supply connector (J12)
12 Power supply connector (J14)
13 VRM 2 connector (J13)
14 VRM 2 Error LED (CR19)
15 VRM 1 Error LED (CR17)
16 VRM 1 connector (J5)
17 Fans 1 and 2 connector (J8)
18 Switch block 2 (SW2)
19 Switch block 1 (SW1) (might not be present on your server)
2 Microprocessor 1 Error LED (CR12)
21 Microprocessor 1 connector (U5)
22 System board connectors (J9 and J25) (on reverse side of processor
board)
23 DIMM 1 Error LED (CR8)
24 DIMM 2 Error LED (CR9)
25 DIMM 3 Error LED (CR10)
26 DIMM 4 Error LED (CR11)
27 Fan 3 connector (J10)
Chapter 5. System board and processor board
101
Processor-board jumper and switches
Table 13 contains the description of the jumper block located on the processor
board. Table 14 shows the switch settings for switch block 2. The highlighted
numbers in the tables refer to the highlighted numbers in the illustration in
“Processor-board component locations” on page 101.
Notes:
1. Turn off the server, and disconnect the power cords before moving any jumpers
or changing any switch settings.
2. Be sure the processor speed switch is set correctly. For a 600/100 MHz2
microprocessor, switch 2 of switch block 2 (SW2) must be set to ON. See
Table 14.
Attention: If switch 2 of switch block 2 is set incorrectly, components might
overheat and component damage might occur. Be sure that the microprocessor
core-frequency selection is properly set.
Table 13. Processor-board jumpers
Jumper name
Description
6 J15 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 2 and 3.
Table 14. Processor-board switch block 2 (SW2) settings
2
Switch
Name
Description
1
BIOS Recovery
The default position is OFF.
Changing the switch position to ON
enables BIOS recovery mode. (See
“Recovering BIOS” on page 124 for
more information.)
2
Processor Speed
The default position is OFF. This
sets the system bus speed to
133 MHz.
3
Reserved
The default position is OFF.
4
Bypass Power On Password
The default position is OFF.
Changing the switch position to ON
bypasses the power-on password
check.
600 MHz denotes internal clock speed of the microprocessor only; other factors also affect application performance.
102
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Bypassing an unknown power-on password
When a power-on password is set, POST does not complete until you enter the
password. If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the
server through either of the following methods:
Enter the administrator password at the power-on prompt, if an administrator
password has been set. (If necessary, see “Using the administrator password
menu” on page 25 for details.) Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program
and change the power-on password. See “Using the power-on password
menu” on page 24.
Change switch 4 of switch block 2 (SW2) to the ON position to bypass the
power-on password check. You can then start the Configuration/Setup Utility
program and change the power-on password. See “Using the power-on
password menu” on page 24.
Changing jumper positions
Jumpers located on the system board and the processor board help you to
customize the way your server operates.
Your system board and processor board contain two-pin and three-pin jumper
blocks.
In some cases, groups of jumpers might combine to define a function.
Chapter 5. System board and processor board
103
Two-pin jumper blocks
Covering both pins with a jumper defines one function of the jumper block. To
change the function of the jumper block, cover one pin only or remove the jumper
entirely.
The following illustration identifies pins 1 and 2 on a two-pin jumper block.
2
1
To change a jumper position for a two-pin jumper block:
1. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the server power cords.
2. Remove the server cover (see “Preparing to install options” on page 46).
3. Do one of the following:
Lift the jumper straight off the pin block.
Align the holes in the bottom of the jumper with the two pins on the pin
block, and then slide the jumper onto these pins.
Align one of the holes in the bottom of the jumper with one of the pins on
the pin block, and then slide the jumper onto that pin only.
4. Reinstall the server cover and connect the cables (see “Completing the
installation” on page 85).
104
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Three-pin jumper blocks
With the three-pin jumper blocks, each jumper covers two of the three pins on a pin
block. You can position the jumper to fit over the center pin and either of the other
two pins.
The following illustration identifies pins 1, 2, and 3 on a three-pin jumper block.
3
2
1
To change a jumper position for a three-pin jumper block:
1. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the server power cords.
2. Remove the server cover (see “Preparing to install options” on page 46).
3. Lift the jumper straight off the pin block.
4. Align the holes in the bottom of the jumper with the center pin and the pin that
was not covered previously.
5. Slide the jumper fully onto these pins.
6. Reinstall the server cover and connect the cables (see “Completing the
installation” on page 85).
Chapter 5. System board and processor board
105
106
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Chapter 6. Solving problems
Server problems can be caused by hardware, software, or a user error. An
example of a user error is pressing the wrong key on the keyboard. You can check
server hardware by using the diagnostic programs and other information in this
section.
Diagnostic tools overview
The following tools are available to help identify and resolve hardware-related
problems:
Diagnostic programs
Power-on self-test (POST)
POST beep codes
Error messages
Troubleshooting charts
Option diskettes
Diagnostic programs
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable read-only memory (ROM)
on the system board. These programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of your server, such as the the system board, Ethernet controller,
video controller, RAM, keyboard, mouse (pointing device), diskette drive, serial port,
and parallel port. You can also use them to test some external devices.
Also, if you cannot determine whether a problem is caused by the hardware or by
the software, you can run the diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is
working properly.
Note: When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause
several error messages. When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the
first error message. After the cause of the first error message is corrected,
the other error messages might not occur the next time you run the test.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
107
Troubleshooting and server support flowchart
Server Support
Server working
properly?
Yes
Register and profile your server
After you register and profile, you will be able to:
• Diagnose problems using the IBM Online Assistant
• Participate in the IBM discussion forum
• Receive e-mail notifications of technical updates
related to your profiled products
No
Check all cables for loose connections
and verify that all optional devices you
installed are on the ServerProven list.
You can view the ServerProven list at:
Register at: http://www.ibm.com/pc/register
Profile at: http://www.ibm.com/pc/support
http://www.ibm.com/pc/compat
Problem
solved?
Yes
No
You can view a list of
IBM Help Center phone numbers at:
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support
Use the troubleshooting
information provided with
your server to determine
the cause of the problem
and the action to take.
Problem
solved?
Yes
No
Flash the latest levels of BIOS,
service processor, diagnostics,
and RAID code.
You can download this code at:
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support
108
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Yes
Problem
solved?
No
Phone an
IBM Help Center
Power-on self-test (POST)
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of
server components and some of the options installed in the server. This series of
tests is called the power-on self-test, or POST.
POST does the following:
Checks the operation of some basic system-board operations
Checks the memory
Compares the current server configuration with the stored server configuration
information
Configures PCI adapters
Starts the video operation
Verifies that drives (such as the diskette, CD-ROM, and hard disk drives) are
connected properly
If you have a power-on password or administrator password set, you must type the
password and press Enter, when prompted, before POST will continue.
While the memory is being tested, the amount of available memory appears on the
screen. These numbers advance as the server progresses through POST, and the
final number that appears on the screen represents the total amount of memory
available. If POST finishes without detecting any problems, a single beep sounds,
the first screen of your operating system or application program appears, and the
System POST Complete (OK) light is illuminated on the operator information panel.
If POST detects a problem, more than one beep sounds, and an error message
appears on your screen.
Note: A single problem might cause several error messages. When this occurs,
work to correct the cause of the first error message. After the cause of the
first error message is corrected, the other error messages usually will not
occur the next time you run the test.
POST beep codes
POST generates beep codes to indicate successful completion or the detection of a
problem.
One beep indicates the successful completion of POST.
More than one beep indicates that POST detected a problem. For more
information, see “Power-on self test (POST) beep codes” on page 122.
Error messages
Error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not intended to be used to
identify a failing part. Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems indicated
by error messages should be performed by trained service personnel.
Hardware error messages that occur can be text, numeric, or both. Messages
generated by your software generally are text messages, but they also can be
numeric.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
109
POST error messages
POST error messages occur during startup when POST finds a problem with the
hardware or detects a change in the hardware configuration. For more information,
see “Power-on self-test (POST) messages” on page 112.
Diagnostic error messages
Diagnostic error messages occur when a test finds a problem with the server
hardware. These error messages are alphanumeric, and they are saved in the test
log. For more information, see “Diagnostic error message tables” on page 125.
Software-generated error messages
These messages occur if a problem or conflict is found by an application program,
the operating system, or both. Messages are generally text messages, but they
also can be numeric. For information about these error messages, refer to the
documentation that comes with your software.
Troubleshooting charts
The “Troubleshooting charts” on page 143 list symptoms of problems (for example,
a symptom might be “The mouse or pointing device does not work.”), along with
steps to correct the problems.
System error log
The system error log contains all error and warning messages issued during POST
and all system status messages from the Advanced System Management
Processor. See “System Event/Error Log” on page 29 for information about how to
view the system error log.
Option diskettes
An optional device or adapter might come with an option diskette. Option diskettes
usually contain option-specific diagnostic test programs or configuration files.
If your optional device or adapter comes with an option diskette, follow the
instructions that come with the option. Different instructions apply depending on
whether the option diskette is startable or not.
Diagnostic programs
This section includes useful information about running the diagnostic programs.
These programs are designed to test the IBM server. If you want to test a non-IBM
product, refer to the information that comes with that product.
Note: When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause
several error messages. When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the
first error message. After the cause of the first error message is corrected,
the other error messages usually will not occur the next time you run the
test.
110
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Running diagnostic programs
While you are running the diagnostic programs, F1 displays Help information.
Pressing F1 from within a help screen provides online documentation from which
you can select different categories. Pressing Esc exits from Help and returns to
where you left off. See “Diagnostic error message tables” on page 125 for
explanations of the diagnostic error messages.
Important
If you run the diagnostic programs with either no mouse or a USB mouse
attached to your server, you will not be able to navigate between test categories
using the Next Cat and Prev Cat buttons. All other functions provided by
mouse-selectable buttons are also available using the function keys.
You can test the USB keyboard using the regular keyboard test. The regular
mouse test cannot test a USB mouse. Also, you can run the USB hub test only
if there are no USB devices attached.
Notes:
1. To run the diagnostic programs, you must start the server with the highest level
password that is set. That is, if an administrator password is set, you must
enter the administrator password, not the power-on password, to run the
diagnostic programs.
2. If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server
and try running the diagnostic programs again. If the problem persists, have
the system serviced.
3. If the diagnostic tests do not find a problem but the problem persists during
normal operations, see “Troubleshooting” on page 143 and look for the
problem symptom.
4. You might have to install a wrap connector on your active parallel, serial, or
Ethernet port to obtain accurate test results for these ports. If you do not have
a wrap connector, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
5. You might need a scratch diskette (that is, a diskette that has no contents that
you want to save) to obtain accurate test results when testing the diskette
drive.
6. The keyboard and mouse (pointing device) tests assume that a keyboard and
mouse are attached to the server.
To start the diagnostic programs:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
If the server is turned on already, shut down your operating system and restart
the server.
2. When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2.
If a power-on password or administrator password is set, the server prompts
you for it. Type the appropriate password; then, press Enter.
3. The Diagnostics Programs screen appears.
4. Select either Extended or Basic from the top of the screen.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
111
5. Select the test you want to run from the list that appears; then, follow the
instructions on the screen.
When the tests have completed, you can view the test log by selecting Utility
from the top of the screen.
Also, you can view server configuration information (such as system
configuration, memory contents, interrupt request (IRQ) use, direct memory
access (DMA) use, device drivers, and so on) by selecting Hardware Info from
the top of the screen.
If the hardware checks out OK but the problem persists during normal server
operations, a software error might be the cause. If you suspect a software
problem, refer to the information that comes with the software package.
Viewing the test log
If you are already running the diagnostic programs, continue with step 4 in this
procedure.
Notes:
1. The test log will not contain any information until after the diagnostic program
has run.
2. The test log is maintained in memory while the server is turned on. Turning off
the power clears the test log.
To view the Test Log:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
If the server is turned on already, shut down your operating system and restart
the server.
2. When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2.
If a power-on password or administrator password is set, the server prompts
you for it. Type the appropriate password; then, press Enter.
3. The Diagnostic Programs screen appears.
4. Select Utility from the top of the screen.
5. Select View Test Log from the list that appears; then, follow instructions on the
screen.
Power-on self-test (POST) messages
The following table shows error messages that can appear on the screen during the
power-on self-test (POST).
Notes:
1. The actions for some of the messages require you to run the
Configuration/Setup Utility program. For information about using these
programs, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 21.
2. If a password prompt appears with a POST message, type the administrator or
power-on password; then, press Enter.
112
IBM xSeries User's Reference
POST message table
POST message
062
Description
The server failed to boot on three consecutive attempts.
All caches are disabled. This can be caused by repeatedly turning the server on
and then off or resetting the server.
Action: Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and verify that all settings are
correct. (See Chapter 3, “Configuring your server.”) Use the Cache Control
selection in the Advanced Setup menu of the Configuration/Setup Utility program to
enable the caches. (See “Advanced Setup” on page 27.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced. When the problem is corrected,
make sure to enable the caches.
101
102
An error occurred during the system board and microprocessor test.
106
An error occurred during the system board and microprocessor test.
Action: Have the system serviced.
Action: Have the system serviced.
114
An adapter read-only memory (ROM) error occurred.
Action: Remove the options. If you can start the server without the options
installed, reinstall each option one at a time and retest after each is reinstalled.
When an option fails, replace it.
If you cannot isolate and correct the problem, have the system serviced.
129
An error was detected in the L1 cache of one of the microprocessors.
Action:
1. If you just installed a microprocessor, verify that the microprocessor is installed
and seated correctly.
2. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a
microprocessor:
If the System Error light on the operator information panel is on, check to
see if the CPU LED on the diagnostic LED panel is on. If it is on, check the
Microprocessor Error LEDs next to the microprocessor sockets on the
processor board (see “Processor-board component locations” on page 101).
– If a Microprocessor LED is on, run the diagnostic program for the
microprocessor indicated by the LED. If the tests fail, replace the
indicated microprocessor.
– If the microprocessor tests do not fail, have the system serviced.
If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program might provide additional information about the microprocessor
error.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
151
A real-time clock (RTC) error occurred.
Action: Have the system serviced.
161
The real-time clock battery has failed.
Action: Have the system serviced or replace the battery yourself. For additional
information, see “Replacing the battery” on page 157 before you attempt to change
the battery.
You can use the server until you replace the battery. However, you must run the
Configuration/Setup Utility program and set the time and date and other custom
settings each time you turn on the server.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
113
POST message
162
Description
A change in device configuration occurred. This error occurs under one or more of
the following conditions:
A new device has been installed.
A device has been moved to a different location or cable connection.
A device has been removed or disconnected from a cable.
A device is failing and is no longer recognized by the server as being installed.
An external device is not turned on.
An invalid checksum is detected in the battery-backed memory.
Action: Verify that all external devices are turned on. You must turn on external
devices before turning on the server.
If you did not add, remove, or change the location of a device, a device is probably
failing. Running the diagnostic test programs might isolate the failing device, but
you must have the system serviced.
163
The time of day has not been set.
Action: Set the correct date and time. If the date and time are set correctly and
saved, but the 163 error message reappears, have the system serviced.
The server can be used until the system is serviced, but any application programs
that use the date and time will be affected.
164
A change in the memory configuration occurred. This message might appear after
you add or remove memory.
Note: The server can be used with decreased memory capacity.
Action:
1. If POST error message 289 also occurred, follow the instructions for that error
message first.
2. If you have installed or removed memory, run the Configuration/Setup Utility
program; then, exit, saving the new configuration settings. For information
about using the Configuration/Setup Utility program see “Using the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 21.
If the message appears again, shutdown the server, reseat the memory
modules, and restart the server.
3. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a
memory module:
If the System Error light on the operator information panel is on, check to
see if the MEM LED on the diagnostic LED panel is on. If it is on, check
the DIMM Error LEDs next to the memory sockets on the processor board
(see “Processor-board component locations” on page 101). If a DIMM Error
LED is on, run the diagnostic program for the memory.
– If the tests fail, replace the DIMM. If the problem persists after you
replace the DIMM, have the system serviced.
– If the memory tests do not fail, have the system serviced.
If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program might provide additional information on the memory error.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
175
A vital product data (VPD) error occurred.
Action: Have the system serviced.
176
177
178
A security hardware error occurred.
184
The power-on password information stored in your server has been removed.
Action: Check for indications that someone has tampered with the server. If no
one has tampered with the server, have the system serviced.
Action: From the Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu, select System
Security. Then, follow the instructions on the screen. For information about using
the Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu” on page 21.
If this information cannot be restored, have the system serviced.
114
IBM xSeries User's Reference
POST message
185
Description
A power failure damaged the stored information about the drive-startup sequence.
Action: From the Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu, select Start
Options; then, follow the instructions on the screen. For information about using
the Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu” on page 21.
If this information cannot be restored, have the system serviced.
186
A system board or hardware error occurred.
Action: Have the system serviced.
187
The VPD serial number is not set.
Action: The system serial number is set in the VPD EEPROM at the time of
manufacturing. If the system board has been replaced, the system serial number
will be invalid and should be set. From the main menu of the Configuration/Setup
Utility program, select System Information, then select Product Data. If the
problem persists, have the system serviced.
188
A vital product data (VPD) error occurred.
Action: Have the system serviced.
189
An attempt has been made to access the server with invalid passwords. After three
incorrect attempts, the server locks up; that is, the logon data fields are no longer
available to the user.
201
An error occurred during the memory controller test. This error can be caused by:
Incorrectly installed memory
A failing memory module
A processor-board problem
A system board problem
Action:
1. If you just installed memory, see “Installing memory-module kits” on page 65 to
verify that the new memory is correct for your server. Verify that the memory
modules are installed and seated correctly.
2. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a
memory module:
If the System Error light on the operator information panel is on, check to
see if the MEM LED on the diagnostic LED panel is on. If it is on, check
the DIMM Error LEDs next to the memory sockets on the processor board
(see “Processor-board component locations” on page 101). If a DIMM Error
LED is on, run the diagnostic program for the memory.
If the tests fail, replace the DIMM. If the problem persists after you replace
the DIMM, have the system serviced.
If the memory tests do not fail, have the system serviced.
3. If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility program
might provide additional information on the memory error.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
115
POST message
229
Description
An error was detected in the L2 cache of one of the microprocessors.
Action:
1. If you just installed a microprocessor, verify that the microprocessor is installed
and seated correctly.
2. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a
microprocessor:
If the System Error light on the operator information panel is on, check to
see if the CPU LED on the diagnostic LED panel is on. If it is on, check the
Microprocessor Error LEDs next to the microprocessor sockets on the
processor board (see “Processor-board component locations” on page 101).
– If a Microprocessor LED is on, run the diagnostic program for the
microprocessor indicated by the LED. (If the Secondary Microprocessor
Error LED is on, run the “Alt CPU” diagnostic program.) If the tests fail,
replace the microprocessor.
– If the microprocessor tests do not fail, have the system serviced.
If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program might provide additional information on the microprocessor error.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
289
An error occurred during POST memory tests and a failing DIMM was disabled.
Note: The server can be used with decreased memory.
Action:
1. If you just installed memory, see “Installing memory-module kits” on page 65 to
verify that the new memory is correct for your server. Verify that the memory
modules are installed and seated correctly. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility
program (see Chapter 3, “Configuring your server”). In the Advanced Setup
menu, select Memory Settings and enable the DIMM. (See “Advanced Setup”
on page 27.)
2. If the problem persists, replace the failing DIMM.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
301
303
An error occurred during the keyboard and keyboard controller test. These error
messages also might be accompanied by continuous beeping.
Action: Ensure that:
1. Nothing is resting on the keyboard and pressing a key.
2. No key is stuck.
3. The keyboard cable is connected correctly to the keyboard and to the correct
connector on the server.
Running the diagnostic tests can isolate the server component that failed, but you
must have your system serviced. If the error message remains, have the keyboard,
cable, and system serviced.
Note: If you have just connected a new mouse or other pointing device, turn off
the server and disconnect that device. Wait at least five seconds, and then,
turn on the server. If the error message goes away, replace the device.
602
Invalid diskette boot record
Action:
1. Replace the diskette.
2. If the problem persists, make sure that the diskette drive cables are correctly
and securely connected.
3. If the problem persists, replace the diskette drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
604
An error occurred during a diskette drive test.
Action:
1. Verify that the Configuration/Setup Utility program correctly reflects the type of
diskette drive that you have installed.
2. Run the diagnostic tests. If the diagnostic tests fail, have the system serviced.
116
IBM xSeries User's Reference
POST message
662
Description
A diskette drive configuration error occurred.
Action: If you removed a diskette drive, make sure that the diskette drive setting is
correct in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. If the setting is not correct,
change it. For information about using the Configuration/Setup Utility program, see
“Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 21.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
962
A parallel port configuration error occurred.
Action: If you changed a hardware option, make sure that the parallel port setting
is correct in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. If the setting is not correct,
change it. For information about using the Configuration/Setup Utility program see
“Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 21.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
11xx
An error occurred during the system-board serial port test.
Action: If you have a modem, serial printer, or other serial device attached to your
server, verify that the serial cable is connected correctly. If it is, use the following
procedure:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Disconnect the serial cable from the serial port.
3. Wait five seconds; then, turn on the server.
If the POST error message does not reappear, either the serial cable or the device
is probably failing. See the documentation that comes with the serial device for
additional testing information.
If the POST error message reappears, have the system serviced.
1162
The serial port configuration conflicts with another device in the system.
Action:
1. Make sure the IRQ and I/O port assignments needed by the serial port are
available. (See Chapter 3, “Configuring your server.”)
2. If all interrupts are being used by adapters, you might need to remove an
adapter to make an interrupt available to the serial port, or force other adapters
to share an interrupt. For information about removing adapters, see “Working
with adapters” on page 53. For information about setting interrupts, see
Chapter 3, “Configuring your server.”
1301
Cable to Information LED panel not detected.
Action: Make sure that the cable to the operator information panel is connected.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1302
Cable to Power and Reset pushbuttons not detected.
Action: Make sure that the cable to the Power and Reset pushbuttons is
connected.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1303
I2C cable to Power Backplane not detected.
Action: Make sure that the cable to the power backplane is connected.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1304
Cable to Diagnostic LED panel not detected.
Action: Make sure that the cable to the diagnostic LED panel is connected.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
117
POST message
1600
Description
The Advanced System Management Processor is not functioning.
Action:
1. If a jumper is installed on pins 7 and 8 of jumper block J20 of the system board,
remove it or move it to pins 8 and 9.
2. Disconnect the server from all electrical sources, wait for 30 seconds, reconnect
the server to the electrical sources, and restart the server.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1601
The Advanced System Management Processor BIOS needs to be updated.
Action:
1. Disconnect the server from all electrical sources, wait for 30 seconds, reconnect
the server to the electrical sources, and restart the server.
2. If the problem persists, update the Advanced System Management Processor
BIOS. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information” on page 161
for information about obtaining updates.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1800
A PCI adapter has requested a hardware interrupt that is not available.
Action:
1. Make sure that the PCI adapter and all other adapters are set correctly in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program. If the interrupt resource settings are not
correct, change the settings. For information about using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “PCI Slot/Device Information” on
page 28.
2. If all interrupts are being used by other adapters, you might need to remove an
adapter to make an interrupt available to the PCI adapter, or force other
adapters to share an interrupt. For information about removing adapters, see
“Working with adapters” on page 53. For information about setting interrupts,
see “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.
1962
No valid startup devices were found. The system cannot find the startup drive or
operating system.
Action: Be sure that the drive you want to start from is in the startup sequence.
1. Select Start Options from the Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu.
If you are unable to set the startup sequence, have the system serviced.
2. Check the list of startup devices in the Startup device data fields. Is the drive
you want to start from in the startup sequence?
Yes Exit from this screen; then select Exit Setup to exit from the
Configuration/Setup menu. Go to step 3.
No
Follow the instructions on the screen to add the drive; then save the
changes and exit from the Configuration/Setup menu. Restart the server.
3. Is an operating system installed?
Yes Turn off the server. Go to step 4.
No
Install the operating system in your server; follow your operating system
instructions to shut down and restart the server.
4. During server startup, watch for messages indicating a hardware problem.
If the same error message appears, have the system serviced.
2400
An error occurred during the testing of the video controller on the system board.
This error can be caused by a failing monitor, a failing system board, or a failing
video adapter (if one is installed).
Action: Verify that the monitor is connected correctly to the video connector. If the
monitor is connected correctly, have the system serviced.
2462
A video memory configuration error occurred.
Action: Make sure that the monitor cables are correctly and securely connected to
the server.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
118
IBM xSeries User's Reference
POST message
5962
Description
An IDE CD-ROM configuration error occurred.
Action: Check the signal and power cable connections to the CD-ROM drive. See
“System-board component locations” on page 99 for the locations of the cable
connectors on the system board.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
8603
An error occurred during the mouse (pointing device) and mouse (pointing device)
controller test. This error can be caused by the addition or removal of a mouse, or
by a failing system board.
Note: This error also can occur if electrical power was lost for a very brief period
and then restored. In this case, turn off the server for at least five seconds,
and then, turn it back on.
Action: Ensure that the keyboard and mouse (pointing device) are attached to the
correct connectors. If they are connected correctly, use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Disconnect the mouse from the server.
3. Turn on the server.
If the POST error message does not reappear, the mouse is probably failing. See
the documentation that comes with the mouse for additional testing information. If
the problem remains, have the mouse (pointing device) serviced.
If the POST error message reappears, run the diagnostic tests to isolate the
problem. If the diagnostic tests do not find a problem and the POST error message
remains, have the system serviced.
00012000
Processor machine check.
Action:
1. Update the system BIOS. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and
information” on page 161 for information about obtaining updates.
2. If the problem persists, replace the microprocessor.
00019501
Processor 1 is not functioning.
Action: Replace microprocessor 1. (The Microprocessor 1 Error LED on the
processor board will be on. See “Processor-board component locations” on
page 101 for the location of the LED.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
00019502
Processor 2 is not functioning.
Action: Replace microprocessor 2. (The Microprocessor 2 Error LED on the
processor board will be on. See “Processor-board component locations” on
page 101 for the location of the LED.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
00019701
Processor 1 failed the built-in self test.
Action: Replace microprocessor 1. (The Microprocessor 1 Error LED on the
processor board will be on. See “Processor-board component locations” on
page 101 for the location of the LED.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
00019702
Processor 2 failed the built-in self-test.
Action: Replace microprocessor 2. (The Microprocessor 2 Error LED on the
processor board will be on. See “Processor-board component locations” on
page 101 for the location of the LED.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
119
POST message
00180100
Description
A PCI adapter has requested memory resources that are not available.
Action:
1. Make sure that the PCI adapter and all other adapters are set correctly in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program. If the memory resource settings are not
correct, change the settings. For information about using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu” on page 21.
2. If all memory resources are being used, you might need to remove an adapter
to make memory available to the PCI adapter. For information about removing
adapters, see “Working with adapters” on page 53. Disabling the adapter BIOS
on the adapter might correct the error. Refer to the documentation provided
with the adapter.
00180200
A PCI adapter has requested an I/O address that is not available, or the PCI
adapter might be defective.
Action:
1. Make sure that the I/O address for the PCI adapter and all other adapters are
set correctly in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. For information about
using the Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 21.
2. If the I/O port resource settings are correct, the PCI adapter might be defective.
Have the system serviced.
00180300
A PCI adapter has requested a memory address that is not available, or the PCI
adapter might be defective.
Action:
1. Make sure that the memory address for all other adapters are set correctly in
the Configuration/Setup Utility program. If the memory resource settings are not
correct, change the settings. For information about using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu” on page 21.
2. If the memory resource settings are correct, the PCI adapter might be defective.
Have the system serviced.
00180400
A PCI adapter has requested a memory address that is not available.
Action: If all memory addresses are being used, you might need to remove an
adapter to make memory address space available to the PCI adapter. For
information about removing adapters, see “Working with adapters” on page 53.
Disabling the adapter BIOS on the adapter might correct the error. Refer to the
documentation provided with the adapter.
00180500
A PCI adapter ROM error occurred.
Action: Remove the PCI adapters. If you can start the server without the
adapters, reinstall each adapter one at a time and retest after each is reinstalled.
When an adapter fails, replace it.
If you cannot isolate and correct the problem, have the system serviced.
00180600
A PCI-to-PCI bridge error occurred. More than one PCI bus tried to access memory
below 1 MB.
Action: Remove the PCI adapter that has the PCI bridge. If you can start the
server without the adapter, reinstall and retest the adapter. If the adapter fails,
replace it.
If you cannot isolate and correct the problem, have the system serviced.
00180700
xxxxyyyy Planar PCI device does not respond.
where xxxx is the PCI vendor ID and yyyy is the PCI device ID.
Action: Have the system serviced.
120
IBM xSeries User's Reference
POST message
00180800
Description
An unsupported PCI device is installed.
Action: Remove the PCI adapters. If you can start the server without the
adapters, reinstall each adapter one at a time and retest after each is reinstalled.
When an adapter fails, replace it.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
00181000
PCI error.
Action: Remove the PCI adapters. If you can start the server without the
adapters, reinstall each adapter one at a time and retest after each is reinstalled.
When an adapter fails, replace it.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
01295085
The ECC checking hardware test failed.
Action: Have the system serviced.
01298001
No update data is available for processor 1.
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors
installed in the server. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information”
on page 161 for information about obtaining updates.
01298002
No update data is available for processor 2.
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors
installed in the server. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information”
on page 161 for information about obtaining updates.
01298101
The update data for processor 1 is incorrect.
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors
installed in the server. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information”
on page 161 for information about obtaining updates.
01298102
The update data for processor 2 is incorrect.
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors
installed in the server. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information”
on page 161 for information about obtaining updates.
01298200
Microprocessor speed mismatch
Action: The microprocessors installed do not run at the same speed; install
microprocessors with identical speeds.
I9990301
A hard disk drive error occurred.
Action: Have the system serviced.
I9990305
POST could not find an operating system.
Action: Install an operating system. If you have already installed the operating
system, check the drive startup sequence (see “Start Options” on page 27). If the
drive sequence is correct, run the diagnostic tests to verify that the hard disk drive is
functioning correctly. If there is a problem with the hard disk drive (such as a bad
sector), you might have to reinstall the operating system.
If you cannot reinstall the operating system, have the system serviced.
I9990650
AC power has been restored.
Action: No action is required. This message appears each time ac power is
restored to the server after an ac power loss.
Other Numbers
POST found an error.
Action: Follow the instructions on the screen.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
121
Power-on self test (POST) beep codes
The successful completion of POST is indicated by one beep and the appearance
of the first screen of your operating system or application program. More than one
beep indicates that POST detected an error.
Beep codes are sounded in a series of beeps. For example, a 1–2–4 beep code
sounds like one beep, a pause, two consecutive beeps, another pause, and four
more consecutive beeps.
POST beep code descriptions
The following list contains more detailed descriptions of the possible types of beeps
that your server might emit.
No beeps
If no beep occurs after your server successfully completes POST (that is,
after the System POST Complete (OK) light on the operator information
panel is illuminated), have the system serviced.
Continuous beep
This indicates that your startup (boot) microprocessor has failed, or your
system board or speaker subsystem might contain a failing component. If
the system continues through POST with no errors, have the system
serviced. If no video appears, the startup microprocessor has failed; replace
the startup microprocessor
Note: If the server has only one microprocessor installed, that
microprocessor is installed in microprocessor connector U5 and is the
startup (boot) microprocessor. If two microprocessors are installed,
the microprocessor installed in U6 is the startup microprocessor and
the microprocessor installed in U5 is the application microprocessor
One short beep
If one beep occurs after your server successfully completes POST (that is,
after the System POST Complete (OK) light on the operator information
panel is illuminated), then POST has no configuration or functional errors to
report. One beep also occurs after your server completes POST if you enter
an incorrect power-on password.
Two short beeps
This beep combination indicates that POST encountered an error. The
Configuration/Setup Utility program will display additional information; follow
the instructions displayed. See “Power-on self-test (POST) messages” on
page 112 for explanations of any POST error messages.
Three short beeps
This beep combination indicates a system memory error. This combination
occurs only if the video BIOS cannot display the error message. Replace
the failing memory module.
122
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Repeating short beeps
This beep combination indicates that your server system board might contain
a failing component, your keyboard might be defective, or a key on the
keyboard might be stuck.
Ensure that:
1. Nothing is resting on the keyboard and pressing a key.
2. No key is stuck.
3. The keyboard cable is connected correctly to the keyboard and to the
correct connector on the server.
Running the diagnostic tests can isolate the server component that failed,
but you must have your system serviced. If the error message remains,
have the keyboard, cable, and system serviced.
Note: If you have just connected a new mouse or other pointing device,
turn off the server and disconnect that device. Wait at least five
seconds, and then, turn on the server. If the error message goes
away, replace the device.
One long and one short beep
This beep combination indicates that POST encountered an error on a video
adapter. Have the system serviced if the integrated video adapter on the
system board is being used. If an optional video adapter is being used,
replace the failing video adapter.
One long and two short beeps
This beep combination indicates that a video I/O adapter ROM is not
readable, or the video subsystem is defective. If you hear this beep
combination twice, both the server system board and an optional video
adapter have failed the test. This beep combination might also indicate that
your server system board contains a failing component.
One long and three short beeps
This beep combination indicates that the system-board video subsystem has
not detected a monitor connection to the server. Ensure that the monitor is
connected to the server. If the problem persists, replace the monitor.
Two long and two short beeps
This beep combination indicates that POST does not support the optional
video adapter. This beep combination occurs when a video adapter is
installed that is incompatible with your server. Replace the optional video
adapter with one that is supported by the server or use the integrated video
controller on the system board.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
123
POST beep code table
Beep code
Description
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-2-1
1-2-2
1-2-3
1-4-3
2-1-1
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-2-1
2-2-2
2-2-3
2-2-4
2-3-2
2-3-3
2-3-4
2-4-1
3-1-1
3-1-2
3-1-3
3-1-4
3-2-1
3-2-2
3-2-3
3-2-4
Microprocessor register test has failed.
CMOS write/read test has failed.
BIOS ROM checksum has failed.
Programmable Interval Timer test has failed.
DMA initialization has failed.
DMA page register write/read test has failed.
Interrupt vector loading test has failed.
Secondary DMA register test has failed.
Primary DMA register test has failed.
Primary interrupt mask register test has failed.
Secondary interrupt mask register test has failed.
Interrupt vector loading has failed.
Keyboard controller test has failed.
CMOS power failure and checksum checks have failed.
CMOS configuration information validation has failed.
Screen memory test has failed.
Screen retrace tests have failed.
Search for video ROM has failed.
Screen test indicates the screen is operable.
Timer tick interrupt test has failed.
Interval timer channel 2 test has failed.
RAM test has failed above address hex 0FFFF.
Time-of-Day clock test has failed.
Serial port test has failed.
Parallel port test has failed.
Math coprocessor test has failed.
Comparison of CMOS memory size against actual has failed.
Action: Have the system serviced.
1-2-4
1-3-1
1-3-2
3-3-1
3-3-3
RAM refresh verification has failed.
First 64 Kb RAM test has failed.
First 64 Kb RAM parity test has failed.
A memory size mismatch has occurred.
No memory has been detected in the system.
Action: Reseat the memory modules or install a memory module.
Attention: In some memory configurations, the 3-3-3 beep code might sound
during POST followed by a blank display screen. If this occurs and the Boot Fail
Count feature in the Start Options of the Configuration/Setup Utility is set to
Enabled (its default setting), you must restart the server three times to force the
system BIOS to reset the memory connector or bank of connectors from Disabled to
Enabled. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
2-3-1
3-3-2
Screen initialization has failed.
I2C bus has failed.
Action: Turn off the server and then restart the server. If the problem persists,
have the system serviced.
Recovering BIOS
If your BIOS has become corrupted, such as from a power failure during a flash
update, you can recover your BIOS using the recovery boot block and a BIOS flash
diskette.
Note: You can obtain a BIOS flash diskette from one of the following sources:
Use the ServerGuide program to make a BIOS flash diskette.
Download a BIOS flash diskette from the World Wide Web. Go to
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support/, select IBM Server Support, and make
the selections for your server.
124
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Contact your IBM service representative.
The flash memory of your server contains a protected area that cannot be
overwritten. The recovery boot block is a section of code in this protected area that
enables the server to start up and to read a flash diskette. The flash utility
recovers the system BIOS from the BIOS recovery files on the diskette.
To recover the BIOS:
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 44.
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables
and power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 46); then remove
the cover (see “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on page 48 or
“Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 49).
2. Locate switch block 2 (SW2) on the processor board (see “Processor-board
component locations” on page 101).
3. Set switch 1 on switch block 2 to ON to enable BIOS recovery mode.
4. Insert the BIOS flash diskette into the diskette drive.
5. Restart the server.
The Recovery Boot screen will appear. A progress report, Loading data from
diskette xx%, is displayed. When programming is underway, a further
progress report, Programming block n of 7 yy%, is displayed. When recovery
is complete, Recovery complete, remove the diskette and return boot block
switch to the off position before rebooting..
6. Remove the flash diskette from the diskette drive.
7. Turn off the server.
8. Set switch 1 on switch block 2 (SW2) to OFF to return to normal startup mode.
9. Restart the server. The system should start up normally.
Diagnostic error message tables
Error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not intended to be used to
identify a failing part. Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems indicated
by error messages should be performed by trained service personnel.
Sometimes the first error to occur causes additional errors. In this case, the server
displays more than one error message. Always follow the suggested action
instructions for the first error message that appears.
“Running diagnostic programs” on page 111 gives instructions for running the
diagnostic programs.
The following pages contain the error codes that you might receive in the diagnostic
program detailed test log and summary log when running the diagnostic programs
for your server.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
125
The format for the codes is:
fff-ttt-iii-date-cc-text message
where:
fff
is the three-digit function code that indicates the function being tested
when the error occurred. For example, function code 089 is for the
microprocessor.
ttt
is the three-digit failure code that indicates the exact test failure that
was encountered. (These codes are for trained service personnel and
are described in the Hardware Maintenance Manual.)
iii
is the three-digit device ID. (These codes are for trained service
personnel and are described in the Hardware Maintenance Manual.)
date
is the date that the diagnostic test was run and the error recorded.
cc
is the check digit that is used to verify the validity of the information.
text message is a message that the diagnostic program generates that indicates
the reason for the problem. More information about the text message
follows.
Text messages
The text message format is:
Function Name:
Result (Test-specific string)
where:
Function Name is the name of the function being tested when the error occurred.
This corresponds to the function code (fff) given in the previous list.
Result
can be one of the following:
Passed
This result occurs when the diagnostic test completes
without any errors.
Failed
This result occurs when the diagnostic test discovers an
error.
User Aborted This result occurs when the user ends the diagnostic
test before it is complete.
Not Applicable This result occurs when the user specifies a
diagnostic test for a device that is not present.
Aborted
This result occurs when the test could not proceed
because of the system configuration.
Warning This result occurs when a possible problem is reported
during the diagnostic test, such as when a device that is to
be tested is not installed.
Test-specific string is additional information that the user can use to analyze the
diagnostic problem.
126
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Diagnostic error messages
The following tables display the primary hardware failure messages that the
diagnostics might display.
Function: core system messages (001)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Processor board, ECC Test
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
System board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: video system messages (005)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Processor and system boards
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: serial port messages (011)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Built-in serial port on system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: parallel port messages (014)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Built-in parallel port on system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: USB port interface messages (015)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Can NOT test USB interface while it is in use
If you have a USB keyboard or mouse attached to your server, you cannot run the
diagnostic program for the USB interface.
Action: If you want to test the USB interface, turn off the server, disconnect the
USB keyboard and mouse, attach a regular keyboard and mouse, turn on the
server, and then run the diagnostic program for the USB interface.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
127
Result
Test-specific string
Failed
System board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: PCI interface messages (020)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
System board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
Tab on PCI Hot Swap slot #n is bad.
where n is the number of the failing PCI slot.
Action: Make sure the tab and latch on hot-plug PCI slot n are closed correctly.
Note: For normal operation, the Power LED for the hot-plug PCI slot is on, and the
Attention LEDs are off.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Function: SCSI interface messages (030)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
SCSI adapter in slot n failed register/counter/power test
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action: Refer to the documentation provided with the adapter.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
SCSI controller on system board failed register/counter/power test
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: RAID messages (035)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: No ServeRAID adapter found on system board or PCI bus
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
Adapter in slot n; adapter/drive configuration error
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action:
1. Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program.
2. If the problem persists, replace the ServeRAID adapter in slot n.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
128
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Result
Test-specific string
Failed
Adapter in slot n; internal error
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action:
1. Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program.
2. If the problem persists, replace the ServeRAID adapter in slot n.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Adapter in slot n; memory allocation error
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
Adapter in slot n; PCI configuration error
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action: Replace the ServeRAID adapter in slot n. If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
Failed
Adapter in slot n; POST error
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action: Replace the ServeRAID adapter in slot n. If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
Failed
Logical drive m on adapter in slot n
where m is the number of the failing logical drive and n is the slot number of the
adapter.
Action:
1. Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program.
2. If the problem persists, replace the ServeRAID adapter in slot n.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Logical drive on system board adapter
Action: Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program. If the problem persists,
have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board; adapter/drive configuration error
Action: Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program. If the problem persists,
have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board; internal error
Action: Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program. If the problem persists,
have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board; memory allocation error
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board; PCI configuration error
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board; POST error
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
SCSI drive in bay #n, SCSI ID m
where n is the bay number of the failing drive and m is the SCSI ID of the drive.
Action: Check the cable and power connections on the drive. If the problem
persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
SCSI drive on adapter in slot n, SCSI ID m
where n is the slot number of the adapter and m is the SCSI ID of the drive.
Action: Check the cable and power connections on the drive. If the problem
persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
129
Function: power supply messages (075)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Voltage sensed by the system is out of range
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: microprocessor error messages (089)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Invalid microprocessor in socket id xyz or BIOS setup problem
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Action:
1. Check the system error log for related error messages.
2. If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information”
on page 161 for information about obtaining updates.
3. If the problem persists, replace the indicated microprocessor and run the
microprocessor diagnostic program again.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Microprocessor in socket id xyz
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Note: The Microprocessor Error LED associated with the microprocessor identified
is on. See “Processor-board component locations” on page 101 for the
location of the Microprocessor Error LEDs.
Action:
1. Reseat the microprocessor.
2. If the problem persists, replace the identified microprocessor.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Processor in socket id xyz is defective
where xyz identifies the microprocessor that is causing the error message.
Action: Replace the microprocessor.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Processor in socket id xyz is installed but not functioning
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Action:
1. Check the system error log for related error messages.
2. If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information”
on page 161 for information about obtaining updates.
3. If the problem persists, replace the microprocessor indicated and run the
microprocessor diagnostic program again.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
130
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Result
Test-specific string
Failed
Test setup error: Application microprocessor not installed or BIOS setup problem
Action:
1. Verify that the application microprocessor is installed and seated correctly.
2. Check the system error log for related error messages.
3. If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information”
on page 161 for information about obtaining updates.
4. If the problem persists, replace the application microprocessor and run the
microprocessor diagnostic program again.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
VRM corresponding to Microprocessor in socket id xyz is defective
where xyz identifies the microprocessor whose VRM is causing the error message.
Action: Replace the VRM.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
VRM corresponding to Microprocessor in socket id xyz is not installed
where xyz identifies the microprocessor whose VRM is not installed.
Action: Install a VRM.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Function: Advanced System Management Processor messages
(165)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Advanced System Management Processor on system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: thermal system messages (175)
Function
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Fan #n
where n is the number of the failing fan.
Note: The Fann LED on the diagnostic LED panel will also be on.
Action: Replace the indicated fan.
Failed
Temperature sensed on processor board is out of range
Action: If one of the fan LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel is on, replace the
indicated fan.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
131
Function: status display messages (180)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Diagnostic LED panel
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
Operator information panel
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
LED on hot-swap SCSI backplane
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
LED on processor board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
LED on system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: system memory messages (201)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
DIMM location Jn
where n is the number of the socket containing the failing DIMM.
Note: The DIMM Error LED for the failing DIMM will be on. See “Processor-board
component locations” on page 101 for the locations of the LEDs and the
DIMM connectors.
Action:
1. Reseat the DIMM in DIMM socket Jn.
2. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Test setup error: Corrupt BIOS in ROM
Action: If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the
BIOS to the latest level. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information”
on page 161 for information about obtaining updates.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Test setup error: Corrupt DMI BIOS, information in BIOS is not as expected
Action: If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the
BIOS to the latest level. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information”
on page 161 for information about obtaining updates.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
132
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Function: system cache messages (202)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: BIOS cannot access VPD information
Action: If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the
BIOS to the latest level and run the diagnostic program again. Refer to Chapter 7,
“Getting help, service, and information” on page 161 for information about obtaining
updates.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: Corrupt DMI BIOS. Information in BIOS is not as expected
Action: If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the
BIOS to the latest level and run the diagnostic program again. Refer to Chapter 7,
“Getting help, service, and information” on page 161 for information about obtaining
updates.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: No L2 cache detected on microprocessor socket id xyz or BIOS
setup problem
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Action:
1. If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level and run the diagnostic program again. Refer to Chapter 7,
“Getting help, service, and information” on page 161 for information about
obtaining updates.
2. If the problem persists, replace the identified microprocessor.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: Unknown hardware problem associated with microprocessor in
socket id xyz
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Action:
1. If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level and run the diagnostic program again. Refer to Chapter 7,
“Getting help, service, and information” on page 161 for information about
obtaining updates.
2. If the problem persists, replace the identified microprocessor and run the
diagnostic program again.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Microprocessor in socket ID xyz
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Note: The Microprocessor Error LED for the indicated microprocessor will be on.
See “Processor-board component locations” on page 101 for the location of
the LEDs and the microprocessor connectors.
Action:
1. Reseat the identified microprocessor.
2. If the problem persists, replace the identified microprocessor.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Warning
Test setup error: Cache is disabled. Use system setup to enable before retrying the
test
Action: Use the Cache Control selection in the Advanced Setup menu of the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to enable the cache. (See “Advanced Setup” on
page 27.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
133
Function: diskette drive messages (206)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Internal diskette drive bay
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: CD-ROM messages (215)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: hard disk drive messages (217)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
BIOS drive #n
where n is the drive bay number.
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: magnetic tape drive messages (264)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: No tape drives found
Action:
1. Check the cable and power connections to the drive.
2. If the problem persists, refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
The load/mount test failed for device n on adapter m
where n is the number of the device and m is the adapter number.
Action: Refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
The Read/Write Self-diagnostic failed for device n on adapter m
where n is the number of the device and m is the adapter number.
Action:
1. Insert a new tape cartridge and run the diagnostic test again.
2. If the problem persists, refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
134
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Result
Test-specific string
Failed
The Self-diagnostic failed for device n on adapter m
where n is the number of the device and m is the adapter number.
Action: Refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
The unload/eject pushbutton test failed for device n on adapter m
where n is the number of the device and m is the adapter number.
Action: Refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
This test is applicable only to SCSI tape drives that have a pushbutton. If the
problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
The unload/eject test failed for device n on adapter m
where n is the number of the device and m is the adapter number.
Action: Refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Function: keyboard messages (301)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board keyboard test failed
Action:
1. Replace the keyboard.
2. If the problem persists, replace the keyboard cable.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Function: pointing device (mouse) messages (302)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board pointing device test failed
Action: Replace the pointing device (mouse).
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Function: Ethernet messages (405)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
In PCI slot n
where n is the number of the PCI slot where the failing Ethernet adapter is installed.
Action: Replace the Ethernet adapter in slot n. If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
Failed
On system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
135
Function: analog/digital modem messages (415)
Result
Test-specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Not Applicable
No modem was detected
Action:
1. Make sure that the modem is present and attached to the server.
2. If the problem persists, replace the modem.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Modem Reset Failed
Action: Replace the modem.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
No dialtone detected
Action:
1. Make sure that the phone line is attached to the modem and that there is a dial
tone. (Connect a phone to the phone line and listen for a dial tone.) If there is
no dial tone, have the phone line serviced.
2. If the problem persists, replace the modem.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Not Applicable
PCI modem detected but not enabled
Action:
1. Change the configuration to enable the modem.
2. If the problem persists, replace the modem.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Ethernet controller messages
The integrated Ethernet controller might display messages from the following device
drivers:
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare Server ODI
NDIS Adapter for level 2.01 (OS/2)
NDIS Adapter for level 4.0 (Windows NT)
SCO UNIX LLI
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare server ODI device driver messages
This section contains the error messages for the Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare
server ODI device driver. The explanation and recommended action are included
with each message.
PCNTNW-NW-026 The MSM is unable to parse a required custom keyword.
Explanation: The user entered an incorrect parameter keyword.
Action: Reload the device driver using the correct keyword.
PCNTNW-NW-054 The adapter did not respond to the initialization command.
Explanation: The adapter did not respond when the device driver tried to initialize it.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
136
IBM xSeries User's Reference
PCNTNW-NW-058 The adapter did not respond to the initialization command.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting might not be valid or the EEPROM information might
be incorrect.
Action: Make sure the IRQ settings are correct in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. See “PCI
Slot/Device Information” on page 28 for information on setting the interrupt requests. If the IRQ settings
are correct, have the system serviced.
PCNTNW-NW-066 The cable might be disconnected from the adapter.
Explanation: The cable might be disconnected from the server Ethernet port.
Action: Verify that a cable is connected to the Ethernet port.
PCNTNW-NW-071 The matching virtual adapter could not be found.
Explanation: You tried to load another instance of the device driver with a different I/O address. This
new adapter could not be found.
Action: Verify that you installed an IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter and make sure that the
adapter is seated correctly. If the adapter is seated correctly, have the system serviced.
PCNTNW-NW-072 A resource tag is unavailable.
Explanation: The device driver tried to allocate some resources that were not available.
Action: Add or free some memory in the server. Then, restart the server.
PCNTNW-NW-073 Unable to allocate memory.
Explanation: The device driver failed to allocate the memory needed for normal operation.
Action: Add more memory, or free some memory resources in the server. Then, restart the server.
PCNTNW-NW-074 The hardware interrupt cannot be set.
Explanation: An attempt was made to initialize a given hardware interrupt. The attempt was not
successful.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
If you have an Ethernet adapter installed, make sure the adapter does not share an IRQ with any other
device (see “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
PCNTNW-NW-075 The Multiple Link Interface Driver (MLID) cannot be registered with the Link
Support Layer (LSL).
Explanation: An error occurred while the device driver was trying to register with the LSL.
Action: Check the version of the NetWare or IntraNetWare Operating System. Make sure that this
device driver is correct for the version of NetWare or IntraNetWare that you are using. Restart the
server.
PCNTNW-NW-079 The Multiple Link Interface Driver (MLID) did not initialize MSMTx Free Count.
Explanation: The MSMTx Free Count is not initialized correctly.
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
PCNTNW-NW-086 The driver parameter block is too small.
Explanation: The device driver parameter block is too small.
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
PCNTNW-NW-087 The media parameter block is too small.
Explanation: The device driver media parameter block is too small.
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
137
PCNTNW-NW-091 The hardware configuration conflicts.
Explanation: You tried to load a new frame type for the existing controller. The hardware assumptions
made in doing so are incorrect. This error can also occur if you try to specify a mode (such as
redundancy) that conflicts with another specified mode.
Action: Make sure that your hardware configuration matches the software settings. See “PCI
Slot/Device Information” on page 28 for information on viewing and changing interrupt requests.
PCNTNW-NW-126 The group bit in the node address override was cleared.
Explanation: The IEEE address has a group bit indicating that an address belongs to a group of
stations. This bit is used only as a destination address; it cannot be used as a source address. You
tried to enter a source address with this bit set. The device driver cleared the group bit of the source
address.
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.
PCNTNW-NW-127 The local bit in the node address override was set.
Explanation: The local bit in the IEEE address format indicates that the addresses are being managed
locally. If you use the node-address-override capabilities of this device driver to enter a new address,
the local bit must be set. You entered an address without the local bit set. The device driver has set
the local bit.
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.
PCNTNW-NW-164 The device was not found.
Explanation: The device driver cannot find an Ethernet controller in the server.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
PCNTNW-NW-165 The device was not found at IOADDRESS.
Explanation: The Ethernet controller cannot be found at the I/O address specified.
Action: The Ethernet controller does not require a parameter for the I/O address. Remove the I/O
address parameter.
PCNTNW-NW-167 PCI scan specified, device not found.
Explanation: The device driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the problem persists, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic programs.
PCNTNW-NW-180 The DMA parameter is not necessary for PCI device.
Explanation: The Ethernet controller does not require a DMA setting.
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.
138
IBM xSeries User's Reference
NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) device driver messages
This section contains the error messages for the NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) device drivers.
The explanation and recommended action are included with each message.
PCNTND-1 Unable to open the Protocol Manager.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-6 Out of memory while allocating buffers.
Explanation: The device driver could not allocate the requested buffers.
Action: Check your system configuration. Edit the PROTOCOL.INI file to reduce the number of
Txbuffers and Rxbuffers specified for the device driver.
PCNTND-7 A Protocol Manager device error occurred.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-8 Bad status for the Protocol Manager.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-9 Cannot find the PROTOCOL.INI entry.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-10 The Protocol Manager Input Output Control (IOCTL) failed.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-11 Protocol Manager registration failed.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-15 Device not found.
Explanation: The device driver cannot find an Ethernet controller in the server.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
PCNTND-16 PCI scan specified, device not found.
Explanation: The device driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
PCNTND-21 The adapter failed the checksum test.
Explanation: The device driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
139
PCNTND-23 WARNING: PCNET IRQ found = xx
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting (xx) in the PROTOCOL.INI file does not match the
hardware IRQ setting.
Action: Remove the IRQ setting from the PROTOCOL.INI file or change the IRQ setting in the
PROTOCOL.INI file to match the IRQ setting shown in the PCI Slot/Device Information selection of the
Advanced Setup menu in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on
page 28.)
PCNTND-24 WARNING: PCNET IRQ does not match PROTOCOL.INI.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting in the PROTOCOL.INI file does not match the
hardware IRQ setting.
Action: Remove the IRQ setting from the PROTOCOL.INI file or change the IRQ setting in the
PROTOCOL.INI file to match the IRQ setting shown in the PCI Slot/Device Information selection of the
Advanced Setup menu in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on
page 28.)
PCNTND-25 PCI scan specified, PCI bus not found!
Explanation: The device driver cannot locate the PCI bus.
Action: Run the diagnostic programs (see “Diagnostic programs” on page 110).
PCNTND-29 WARNING: DMA number is not necessary for PCI device.
Explanation: The Ethernet controller does not require a DMA setting.
Action: Remove the DMA setting in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
PCNTND-33 PCNET device with specified IOBASE is already in use.
Explanation: The specified I/O address number is already in use by another Ethernet controller or
device.
Action: Remove the I/O address setting in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
NDIS 4.0 (Windows NT) device driver messages
This section contains the error messages for the NDIS 4.0 device drivers. The
explanation and recommended action are included with each message.
PermaNet(tm) Server: No Secondary Adapter Found. Grouping Mode is disabled.
Explanation: The failover option requires an adapter that is compatible with the device driver of the
Ethernet controller on the system board. No such adapter was found.
Action: Make sure the correct adapter is installed.
PermaNet(tm) Server: Problem Occurs on the Primary Adapter. Switching over to the Secondary
Adapter.
Explanation: The system detected a problem with the primary Ethernet connection and has transferred
all network traffic to the secondary Ethernet controller.
Action: Identify the cause of the failure on the primary Ethernet connection. Restoring the operational
state of the primary connection will cause the network traffic to automatically transfer to the primary
Ethernet controller.
PermaNet(tm) Server: Switching back to Primary Adapter.
Explanation: The primary Ethernet connection is now operating correctly. Network traffic will
automatically transfer to the primary Ethernet controller.
Action: None needed, message is for information only.
140
IBM xSeries User's Reference
UNIX messages
This section contains the error messages for the SCO UNIX LLI device driver.
pnt0-2
PCI search specified, PCI device not found!
Explanation: The device driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.
Action: Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
pnt0-6
Cannot allocate memory for the adapter during an interrupt. Please check your
Streams parameters.
Explanation: On a SunSoft Solaris system, this message indicates that the system is out of Streams
memory blocks.
Action: Use the CRASH utility to increase the number of Streams memory blocks.
Modify the interrupt request (IRQ) settings in the Configuration/Setup Utility program, or run the
NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.
pnt0-7
Cannot allocate memory for the adapter during reset. Please check your Streams
parameters.
Explanation: The system is out of Streams memory blocks.
Action: Use the CRASH utility to increase the number of Streams memory blocks.
pnt0-11
Device not found!
Explanation: The device driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
pnt0-12
Device failed checksum test!
Explanation: The device driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
pnt0-13
add_intr_handler failed! Interrupts already enabled.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.
pnt0-14
Cannot locate hardware.
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris device driver cannot find any Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 28.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
pnt0-15
No more devices to open.
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris device driver cannot find any more Ethernet controllers.
Action: Verify that additional IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapters are present or replace the
Ethernet adapter that fails to respond. If the problem persists, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110
to run the diagnostic programs.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
141
pnt0-17
Device fault...Reset initiated!
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris device driver has been reset because of a device fault.
Action: Verify that additional IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapters are present or replace the
Ethernet adapter that fails to respond. If the problem persists, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110
to run the diagnostic programs.
pnt0-19
IRQ found for PCnet hardware does not match space.c (or pnt.conf)!
Explanation: This is a warning message referring to the interrupt request (IRQ) that the SunSoft
Solaris device driver found in the system.
Action: Ignore this message if you are sure that this is what you want to do. Otherwise, run the
NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.
pnt0-20
add_intr_handler failed! Unknown interrupt type.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
pnt0-21
add_intr_handler failed! Out of range interrupt number.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
pnt0-22
add_intr_handler failed! Out of range IPL.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
pnt0-23
add_intr_handler failed! Vector already occupied.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
pnt0-24
add_intr_handler failed! Vector already shared at different IPL.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
pnt0-26
The DMA number is not necessary for PCI device.
Explanation: The IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter does not require a DMA setting.
Action: Edit the SPACE.C file to delete the DMA parameter.
pnt0-29
The IRQ number is already in use.
Explanation: The specified I/O address is already in use.
Action: Run the NETCONFIG program to modify your hardware settings.
142
IBM xSeries User's Reference
pnt0-31
I/O address is not necessary for the PCI device.
Explanation: The I/O address specified is not required.
Action: Remove the assigned I/O address specified for the Ethernet controller.
Troubleshooting
You can use the troubleshooting charts in this section to find solutions to problems
that have definite symptoms.
Note: Review “Electrical safety” on page 42 before you start troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting charts
Look for the symptom in the left column of the chart. Instructions and probable
solutions to the problem are in the right column. If you have just added new
software or a new option and your server is not working, do the following before
using the troubleshooting charts:
Remove the software or device that you just added.
Run the diagnostic tests to determine if your server is running correctly.
Reinstall the new software or new device.
CD-ROM drive
problems
The CD is not working
properly.
Action
Clean the CD by wiping it with a soft, lint-free cloth, from the center of the
CD to the outer edge. Do not clean in a circular pattern. This can cause
loss of data.
If a problem still exists, have the system serviced.
The CD-ROM drive tray
is not working.
The server must be turned on. If the server is on and the tray does not
eject, insert the end of a paper clip into the manual tray-release opening.
If the drive still does not work correctly, have the system serviced.
The CD-ROM drive is not
recognized.
Verify that:
Diskette drive problems
Action
The diskette drive in-use
light stays on, or the
system bypasses the
diskette drive.
If there is a diskette in the drive, verify that:
1. The primary IDE channel is enabled in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program.
2. All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.
3. The correct device driver is installed for the CD-ROM drive.
1. The diskette drive is enabled in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program.
2. The diskette is good and not damaged. (Try another diskette if you
have one.)
3. The diskette is inserted correctly in the drive.
4. The diskette contains the necessary files to start the server.
5. Your software program is OK. See “Software Problem” on page 148.
If the diskette drive in-use light stays on, or the system continues to
bypass the diskette drive, have the system serviced.
Monitor self-tests
Action
Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem
with your monitor, refer to the information that comes with the monitor for
adjusting and testing instructions.
If you still cannot find the problem, have the monitor and system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
143
Monitor problems
Action
The screen is blank.
Verify that:
1. The server power cord is plugged into the server and a working
electrical outlet.
2. The monitor power cord is plugged into the monitor and a working
electrical outlet.
3. The monitor is turned on and the Brightness and Contrast controls are
adjusted correctly.
4. The monitor signal cable is connected to the correct connector on the
server.
Attention: In some memory configurations, the 3-3-3 beep code might
sound during POST followed by a blank display screen. If this occurs and
the Boot Fail Count feature in the Start Options of the
Configuration/Setup Utility is set to Enabled (its default setting), you must
restart the server three times to force the system BIOS to reset the
memory connector or bank of connectors from Disabled to Enabled.
If the problem still exists and the screen remains blank, have the system
serviced.
Only the cursor appears.
Have the system serviced.
The monitor works when
you turn on the server,
but goes blank when you
start some application
programs.
Verify that the primary monitor cable is connected to the video port.
To find the video port, see “Input/output connectors and expansion slots”
on page 11.
The screen flickers.
Set the monitor for the highest, noninterlaced refresh rate available.
Be sure that you installed the necessary device drivers for the
applications.
To reset the refresh rate, use a utility program, such as AnyView
Professional or WinMode.
Wavy, unreadable,
rolling, distorted screen,
or screen jitter.
If the monitor self-tests show the monitor is OK, consider the location of
the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as transformers,
appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause screen jitter
or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this happens,
turn off the monitor. (Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might
cause screen discoloration.) Then move the device and the monitor at
least 305 mm (12 in.) apart. Turn on the monitor.
Note:
1. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, be sure the
distance between monitors and diskette drives is at least 76
mm (3 in.).
2. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.
3. An enhanced monitor cable with additional shielding is
available for the 9521 and 9527 monitors. For information
about the enhanced monitor cable, see your IBM reseller or
IBM marketing representative.
If the problem still exists, have the monitor and system serviced.
Wrong characters appear
on the screen.
If the wrong language is displayed, update the BIOS with the correct
language. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting help, service, and information” on
page 161 for information about obtaining updates for the BIOS.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
144
General problems
Action
Problems such as broken
cover locks or indicator
lights not working.
Have the system serviced.
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Power problems
Action
The server does not
power on.
Verify that:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The power cables are properly connected to the server.
The electrical outlet functions properly.
The type of memory installed is correct.
If you just installed an option, remove it, and restart the server. If the
server now turns on, you might have installed more options than the
power supply supports.
5. The LEDs on the power supply are on. See “Power supply LEDs” on
page 152 for more information about the power supply LEDs.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Intermittent problems
Action
A problem occurs only
occasionally and is
difficult to detect.
Verify that:
1. All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server
and attached options.
2. When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the rear of the server
at the fan grill. If there is no airflow, the fan is not working. This
causes the server to overheat and shut down.
3. Ensure that the SCSI bus and devices are configured correctly and
that the last external device in each SCSI chain is terminated
correctly. See “SCSI drives” on page 69.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Microprocessor
problems
Action
The server emits a
continuous tone during
POST.
The startup (boot) microprocessor is not working properly. If your server
contains two microprocessors, the microprocessor in the highest
numbered microprocessor socket is the startup microprocessor.
1. Verify that the startup microprocessor is seated properly.
2. If your server contains two microprocessors, remove the startup
microprocessor, install a terminator card, and restart the server. If the
server starts properly, replace the old startup microprocessor.
3. Replace the startup microprocessor. Restart the server.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Keyboard, mouse,
or pointingdevice problems
All or some keys on the
keyboard do not work.
Action
1. Make sure that the keyboard cable is properly connected to the
server.
2. Make sure that the server and the monitor are turned on.
3. Try using another keyboard.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
The mouse or pointing
device does not work.
1. Verify that the mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected
and the device drivers are installed correctly.
2. Try using another mouse or pointing device.
If the problem still exists, have the server and the device serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
145
Memory problems
Action
The amount of memory
displayed is less than the
amount of memory
installed.
Verify that:
1. The memory modules are seated properly.
2. You have installed the correct type of memory (see “Installing
memory-module kits” on page 65).
3. If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration
with the Configuration/Setup Utility program. For information about
using the Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 21.
4. All banks of memory on the DIMMs are enabled (see “Memory
Settings” on page 29). The server might have automatically disabled
a DIMM bank when it detected a problem, or a DIMM bank could
have been manually disabled.
If the problem still exists, run the memory diagnostic program. The
system might have detected a bad memory module and automatically
reallocated memory so that the server could continue to operate. If the
memory tests fail, have the system serviced or replace the failing DIMM.
Option problems
Action
An IBM option that used
to work does not work
now.
Verify that all of the option hardware and cable connections are secure.
If the option comes with its own test instructions, use those instructions to
test the option.
If the failing option is a SCSI option, verify that:
1. The cables for all external SCSI options are connected correctly.
2. The last option in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
3. Any external SCSI option is turned on. You must turn on an external
SCSI option before turning on the server.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
An IBM option that was
just installed does not
work.
Verify that:
1. The option is designed for the server. Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting
help, service, and information” on page 161 for information about
obtaining ServerProven compatibility information from the World
Wide Web.
2. You followed the installation instructions that come with the option.
3. The option is installed correctly.
4. You have not loosened any other installed options or cables.
5. You updated the configuration information in the Configuration/Setup
Utility program. Whenever memory or an option is changed, you must
update the configuration. For information about using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 21.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Parallel port problems
Action
The number of parallel
ports displayed is less
than the number of
parallel ports installed.
Verify that:
1. Each port is assigned a unique address.
2. The parallel-port adapter, if you installed one, is seated properly.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
146
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Serial port problems
Action
The number of serial
ports identified by the
operating system is less
than the number of serial
ports installed.
Verify that:
1. Each port is assigned a unique address by the Configuration/Setup
Utility program and none of the serial ports is disabled.
Note: The management C connector is the same as a serial port
connector, but it is used only by the integrated Advanced
System Management Processor, and is not available for use
by the operating system. This port does not appear in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program menus; it can be
configured using the systems-management software provided
with your server.
2. The serial-port adapter, if you installed one, is seated properly.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
A serial device does not
work.
Verify that:
1. The device is compatible with the server. Refer to Chapter 7,
“Getting help, service, and information” on page 161 for information
about obtaining ServerProven compatibility information from the World
Wide Web.
2. The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.
3. Make sure that the device is not connected to management port C.
Note: The management C connector is the same as a serial port
connector, but it is used only by the integrated Advanced
System Management Processor and is not available for use by
the operating system. This port does not appear in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program menus; it can be
configured using the systems-management software provided
with your server.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Universal Serial Bus
(USB) port problems
A USB device does not
work.
Action
Verify that:
1. You are not trying to use a USB device during POST if you have a
standard (non-USB) keyboard attached to the keyboard port.
Note: If a standard (non-USB) keyboard is attached to the keyboard
port, then the USB is disabled and no USB device will work
during POST.
2. The correct USB device driver is installed.
3. Your operating system supports USB devices.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Printer problems
Action
The printer does not
work.
Verify that:
1. The printer is turned on and is online.
2. The printer signal cable is connected to the correct serial or parallel
port on the server. For the location of the serial or parallel port, see
“Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on page 11.
Note: Non-IBM printer cables might cause unpredictable problems.
3. You have assigned the printer port correctly in your operating system
or application program.
4. You have assigned the printer port correctly using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
If the printer still does not work, run the tests described in the
documentation that comes with your printer. If the tests show that the
printer is OK, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
147
Expansion enclosure
problems
The SCSI expansion
enclosure used to work,
but does not work now.
Action
Verify that all of the SCSI expansion enclosure hardware and cable
connections are secure.
Verify that:
1. The cables for all external SCSI options are connected correctly.
2. The last option in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
3. Any external SCSI option is turned on. You must turn on an external
SCSI option before turning on the server.
For more information, see your SCSI and expansion enclosure
documentation.
If the SCSI expansion enclosure comes with its own test instructions, use
those instructions to test it. In addition, test the power supply.
If the problem still exists and the test programs found no problem, have
the server and SCSI expansion enclosure serviced.
Software problems
Action
Suspected software
problem.
To determine if problems are caused by the software, verify that:
1. Your server has the minimum memory requirements needed to use
the software. For memory requirements, refer to the information that
comes with the software.
Note: If you have just installed an adapter or memory, you might
have a memory address conflict.
2. The software is designed to operate on your server.
3. Other software works on your server.
4. The software that you are using works on another system.
If you received any error messages when using the software program,
refer to the information that comes with the software for a description of
the messages and solutions to the problem.
If the problem still exists, contact your place of purchase.
Note: If you cannot find the problem in the troubleshooting charts, go to “Running
diagnostic programs” on page 111 to test the server. If you have run the
diagnostic test programs or if running the tests does not reveal the problem,
have the system serviced.
Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller
This section provides troubleshooting information for problems that might occur with
the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet controller.
Network connection problems
If the Ethernet controller cannot connect to the network, check the following:
Make sure that the cable is installed correctly.
The network cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is
attached but the problem persists, try a different cable.
If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use
Category 5 cabling.
If you directly connect two workstations (without a hub), or if you are not using
a hub with X ports, use a crossover cable.
148
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Note: To determine whether a hub has an X port, check the port label. If the
label contains an X, the hub has an X port.
Determine if the hub supports auto-negotiation. If not, try configuring the
integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and duplex mode of
the hub.
Check the Ethernet controller lights on the operator information panel.
These lights indicate whether a problem exists with the connector, cable, or
hub.
– The Ethernet Link Status light illuminates when the Ethernet controller
receives a LINK pulse from the hub. If the light is off, there might be a bad
connector or cable, or a problem with the hub.
– The Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity light illuminates when the Ethernet
controller sends or receives data over the Ethernet Network. If the
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity light is off, make sure that the hub and
network are operating and that the correct device drivers are loaded.
– The Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps light illuminates when the Ethernet
controller LAN speed is 100 Mbps.
Make sure that you are using the correct device drivers, supplied with your
server.
Check for operating-system-specific causes for the problem.
Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same
protocol.
Test the Ethernet controller.
How you test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating system you
are using (see the Ethernet controller device driver README file).
Ethernet controller troubleshooting chart
You can use the following troubleshooting chart to find solutions to 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet controller problems that have definite symptoms.
Controller problem
Action
The server stops running
when loading device drivers.
The PCI BIOS interrupt settings are incorrect.
Check the following:
Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet
controller is also assigned to another device in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some
devices do not function well when they share an interrupt with a
dissimilar PCI device. Try changing the IRQ assigned to the
Ethernet controller or the other device. (See “Resolving
configuration conflicts” on page 151.) For example, for NetWare
Versions 3 and 4 it is recommended that disk controllers not share
interrupts with LAN controllers.
Make sure that you are using the most recent device driver
available from the World Wide Web. (Refer to Chapter 7, “Getting
help, service, and information” on page 161 for World Wide Web
addresses.)
Run the network diagnostic program.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
149
Controller problem
Action
Ethernet Link Status light
does not light.
Check the following:
Make sure that the hub is turned on.
Check all connections at the Ethernet controller and the hub.
Check the cable. A crossover cable is required unless the hub
has an X designation.
Use another port on the hub.
If the hub does not support auto-negotiation, manually configure
the Ethernet controller to match the hub.
If you manually configured the duplex mode, make sure that you
also manually configure the speed.
Run diagnostics for the LEDs.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
The Ethernet
Transmit/Receive Activity
light does not light.
Check the following:
Note: The Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity LED illuminates only
when data is sent to or by this Ethernet controller.
Data is incorrect or sporadic.
Make sure that you have loaded the network device drivers.
The network might be idle. Try sending data from this workstation.
Run diagnostics on the LEDs.
The function of this LED can be changed by device driver load
parameters. If necessary, remove any LED parameter settings
when you load the device drivers.
Check the following:
Make sure that you are using Category 5 cabling when operating
the server at 100 Mbps.
Make sure that the cables are not close to noise-inducing sources
like fluorescent lights.
The Ethernet controller
stopped working when
another adapter was added
to the server.
Check the following:
Make sure that the cable is connected to the Ethernet controller.
Make sure that your PCI system BIOS is current.
Reseat the adapter (see “Working with adapters” on page 53).
Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet
adapter is also assigned to another device in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some
devices do not function well when they share an interrupt with a
dissimilar PCI device. Try changing the IRQ assigned to the
Ethernet adapter or the other device. (See “Resolving
configuration conflicts” on page 151.)
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
The Ethernet controller
stopped working without
apparent cause.
Check the following:
Run diagnostics for the Ethernet controller.
Try a different connector on the hub.
Reinstall the device drivers. Refer to your operating-system
documentation and to the ServerGuide topic.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
150
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Resolving configuration conflicts
The Configuration/Setup Utility program configures only the server hardware. It
does not consider the requirements of the operating system or the application
programs. For these reasons, memory-address configuration conflicts might occur.
Changing the software configuration setup
The best way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to change the software
configuration by changing the addresses that the EMS device driver defined. The
SVGA video memory occupies 32 KB (1 KB = approximately 1000 bytes) of space
in the hex C0000 to C7FFF EMS memory area. EMS device drivers must use
addresses different from those assigned to video read-only memory (ROM). You
can use the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view or change the current
setting for video ROM. For information about using the Configuration/Setup Utility
program, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 21.
Changing the hardware configuration setup
An alternative way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to change the address of
the conflicting hardware option.
Identifying problems using status LEDs
Your server has LEDs to help you identify problems with some server components.
These LEDs are part of the light path diagnostics built into the server. By following
the path of lights, you can quickly identify the type of system error that occurred.
See “Light path diagnostics” on page 153 for more information.
Status LEDs are located on the following components:
Operator information panel
For more information, see “Operator information panel” on page 10.
Hard disk drive trays
For more information, see “Controls and indicators” on page 7.
Power supply
For more information, see “Power supply LEDs” on page 152.
Diagnostic LED panel
For more information, see “Diagnostic LED panel” on page 153.
System board
See “System-board component locations” on page 99 for locations of the LEDs
on the system board.
Processor board
See “Processor-board component locations” on page 101 for locations of the
LEDs on the processor board.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
151
Power supply LEDs
The AC and DC Power LEDs on the power supply provide status information about
the power supply. See “Power supplies” on page 13 for the location of these
LEDs.
The following table describes the AC and DC Power LEDs.
AC Power LED
DC Power LED
Description and action
On
On
The power supply is on and operating correctly.
On
Off
There is a dc power problem.
Possible causes:
1. The Power Control button on the front of
the server is in the Off position.
Action: Press the Power Control button to
start the server.
2. The power supply has failed.
Action: Replace the power supply.
If the problem persists, have the system
serviced.
Off
Off
There is an ac power problem.
Possible causes:
1. There is no ac power to the power supply.
Actions: Verify that:
The power cord is properly connected
to the server.
The power outlet functions properly.
2. The power supply has failed.
Action: Replace the power supply.
If the problem persists, have the system
serviced.
152
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Diagnostic LED panel
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel inside the
server. See “Light path diagnostics” for information on identifying problems using
these LEDs.
HDD
CPU
VRM
MEMORY
NMI
PCI BUS
SMI
A
B
SERVICE PROCESSOR
BUS
POWER SUPPLY
NON REDUNDANT
1
2
3
FAN
TEMPERATURE
1
2
3
Light path diagnostics
You can use the light path diagnostics built into your server to quickly identify the
type of system error that occurred. Your server is designed so that any LEDs that
are illuminated remain illuminated when the server shuts down as long as the ac
power source is good and the power supplies can supply +5 V dc current to the
server. This feature helps you isolate the problem if an error causes the server to
shut down. See Table 15 on page 154.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
153
Table 15 (Page 1 of 4). Light path diagnostics
System Error
LED (operator
information
panel)
Lit LED on
diagnostic LED
panel
On
A system error
was detected.
Check to see
which of the
LEDs on the
diagnostic LED
panel inside the
server are on.
Cause
Action
None
The system error log is 75% or more
full or a PFA alert was logged.
Check the system error log and correct
any problems. See “POST Error Log”
on page 29 for information about
clearing the error log. Disconnecting
the server from all power sources for at
least 20 seconds will turn off the
System Error LED.
CPU
One of the microprocessors has failed
or a microprocessor is installed in the
wrong connector.
1. Check the Microprocessor Error
LEDs on the processor board.
2. Turn off the server, reseat the
microprocessor indicated by the lit
Microprocessor Error LED, and
restart the server.
3. If the problem persists, replace the
microprocessor.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
VRM
One of the voltage regulator modules
on the processor board has failed.
1. Check the VRM Error LEDs on the
processor board.
2. Turn off the server, reseat the VRM
indicated by the lit VRM Error LED,
and restart the server.
3. If the problem persists, replace the
VRM.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
MEMORY
154
IBM xSeries User's Reference
A memory error occurred.
1. Check the DIMM Error LEDs on the
processor board.
2. Replace the DIMM indicated by the
lit DIMM Error LED.
Table 15 (Page 2 of 4). Light path diagnostics
System Error
LED (operator
information
panel)
Lit LED on
diagnostic LED
panel
On (continued)
PCI BUS A
Cause
An error occurred on PCI bus A. An
adapter in PCI slot 1 or 2 or the system
board caused the error.
Action
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a problem with the
integrated Ethernet controller, have
your system serviced.
2. If you cannot isolate the failing
adapter from the information in the
error log, try to determine the
failing adapter by removing one
adapter at a time from PCI bus A
(PCI slot 1 and 2) and restarting
the server after each adapter is
removed.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
PCI BUS B
An error occurred on PCI bus B. An
adapter in PCI slot 3, 4, or 5, or the
system board caused the error.
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a problem with the
integrated SCSI controller, have the
system serviced.
2. If you cannot correct the problem
from the information in the error
log, try to determine the failing
adapter by removing one adapter
at a time from PCI bus B (PCI slots
3–5) and restarting the server after
each adapter is removed.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
HDD
A hot-swap hard disk drive has failed
on bus 1.
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a temperature problem
and the fans are working correctly,
have the system serviced.
2. If the amber Hard Disk Status LED
on one of the hot-swap hard disk
drives is on, and you have an
optional RAID adapter installed,
refer to the documentation provided
with the adapter for more
information.
NMI
A nonmaskable interrupt occurred.
1. If the PCI BUS A or PCI BUS B
LED is on, follow the instructions
for those LEDs.
2. If the PCI BUS A or PCI BUS B
LED is not on, restart the server.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
155
Table 15 (Page 3 of 4). Light path diagnostics
System Error
LED (operator
information
panel)
Lit LED on
diagnostic LED
panel
On (continued)
SMI
Cause
A systems management event
occurred.
Action
1. Check the system error log for
more information.
2. If the problem persists, restart the
server.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
SERVICE
PROCESSOR
BUS
An error has occurred on the service
processor bus.
Disconnect the server from all electrical
sources, wait 30 seconds, reconnect
the server to the electrical sources, and
restart the server.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
POWER
SUPPLY 1
Power supply 1 has failed.
Replace power supply 1.
POWER
SUPPLY 2
Power supply 2 has failed.
Replace power supply 2.
POWER
SUPPLY 3
Power supply 3 has failed.
Replace power supply 3.
POWER
SUPPLY NON
REDUNDANT
Power supply redundancy has been
lost.
1. If one of the power supply LEDs is
on, replace the indicated power
supply.
2. Install an additional power supply
to regain redundancy.
FAN 1
Fan 1 has failed or is operating too
slowly.
Replace fan 1.
Notes:
1. An LED on the failing fan assembly
will also be on.
2. A failing fan can also cause the
TEMPERATURE and HDD LEDs to
be on.
FAN 2
Fan 2 has failed or is operating too
slowly.
Replace fan 2.
Notes:
1. An LED on the failing fan assembly
will also be on.
2. A failing fan can also cause the
TEMPERATURE and HDD LEDs to
be on.
FAN 3
Fan 3 has failed or is operating too
slowly.
Notes:
1. An LED on the failing fan assembly
will also be on.
2. A failing fan can also cause the
TEMPERATURE and HDD LEDs to
be on.
156
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Replace fan 3.
Table 15 (Page 4 of 4). Light path diagnostics
System Error
LED (operator
information
panel)
Lit LED on
diagnostic LED
panel
On (continued)
TEMPERATURE
Cause
The system temperature has exceeded
a threshold level.
Action
1. Check to see if a fan has failed. If
it has, replace the fan.
2. Make sure the room temperature is
not too hot. (See “Features and
specifications” on page 2.)
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
Off
None
The light path diagnostics have not
detected a system error.
None
Replacing the battery
IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium battery must
be handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the battery, you must
adhere to the following instructions.
2
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354
or an equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If
your system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only
with the same module type made by the same manufacturer. The
battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled,
or disposed of.
Do not:
– Throw or immerse into water
– Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
– Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
Note: In the U.S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about battery disposal.
To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-772-2227 within the United States, and
1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and Canada,
call your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 42 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 44.
Follow any special handling and installation instructions supplied with the
replacement battery.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
157
Note: After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure your server and reset
the system date and time.
To replace the battery:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables
and power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 46); then remove
the cover (see “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on page 48 or
“Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 49).
2. Locate the battery on the system board (see “System-board component
locations” on page 99).
3. Remove adapters to allow access to the battery. (See “Installing a hot-plug
PCI adapter” on page 56 for information about installing and removing adapters
from the hot-plug PCI slots.)
4. Remove the plastic dividers between the hot-swap PCI slots to allow access to
the battery.
5. Remove the battery:
a. Use one finger to lift the battery clip over the battery.
b. Use one finger to slightly slide the battery toward the rear of the server.
The spring mechanism behind the battery will push it out toward you as you
slide it forward.
c. Use your thumb and index finger to pull the battery from under the battery
clip.
d. Ensure that the battery clip is touching the base of the battery socket by
pressing gently on the clip.
6. Insert the new battery:
a. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the front of the socket, under
the battery clip.
b. As you slide it under the battery clip, press the battery down into the
socket.
158
IBM xSeries User's Reference
7. Reinstall any adapters you removed. (See “Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter”
on page 56 for information about installing and removing adapters from the
hot-plug PCI slots.)
8. Reinstall any plastic dividers that you removed.
9. Reinstall the top cover and complete the installation (see “Completing the
installation” on page 85).
Note: You will have to wait approximately 20 seconds after you plug the
power cord of your server into an electrical outlet for the Power Control
button to become active.
10. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and set configuration parameters
as needed.
To set the system date and time, go to “Date and Time” on page 23.
To set the power-on password, go to “Using the power-on password menu”
on page 24.
To reconfigure your server, follow the instructions given in “The
Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 20 (all models).
Chapter 6. Solving problems
159
160
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Chapter 7. Getting help, service, and information
If you need help, service, technical assistance, or just want more information about
IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to assist
you.
For example, IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get
information about IBM products and services, find the latest technical information,
and download device drivers and updates. Some of these pages are:
http://www.ibm.com
Main IBM home page
http://www.ibm.com/pc
IBM Personal
Computing
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support
IBM Personal
Computing Support
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/ibmpc
IBM Commercial
Desktop PCs (U.S.)
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/intellistation
IBM IntelliStation
Workstations (U.S.)
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/accessories
Options by IBM (U.S.)
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/eserver/xseries
IBM xSeries Servers
(U.S.)
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/server/sguide
IBM ServerGuide
(U.S.)
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/netfinity/system_management
IBM Systems
Management (U.S.)
http://www.ibm.com/software/os/warp-server
IBM OS/2 Warp
Server
http://www.ibm.com/pc/techconnect
IBM TechConnect
You can select a country-specific Web site from these pages.
You might also want to visit the Web pages of other companies for information
about other operating systems, software, and accessories. The following are some
other Web sites you might find helpful:
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
161
http://www.lotus.com
http://www.tivoli.com
http://www.microsoft.com
http://www.novell.com
http://www.sco.com
http://www.adaptec.com
http://www.apcc.com
http://www.norton.com
Help is also available from bulletin boards and online services, as well as by fax
and telephone. This section provides information about these sources.
Services available and telephone numbers listed are subject to change without
notice.
Service support
With the original purchase of an IBM hardware product, you have access to
extensive support coverage. During the IBM hardware product warranty period,
you may call the IBM Personal Computer HelpCenter (1-800-772-2227 in the U.S.)
for hardware product assistance covered under the terms of the IBM hardware
warranty. See “Getting help by telephone” on page 165 for HelpCenter telephone
numbers in other countries.
The following services are available during the warranty period:
Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with
determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is
necessary to fix the problem.
IBM hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by IBM
hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are available to provide the
applicable level of service.
Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that
are required after a product has been sold. IBM or your reseller, if authorized
by IBM, will make Engineering Changes (ECs) available that apply to your
hardware.
Be sure to retain your proof of purchase to obtain warranty service.
Please have the following information ready when you call:
Machine Type and Model
Serial numbers of your IBM hardware products
Description of the problem
Exact wording of any error messages
Hardware and software configuration information
If possible, be at your computer when you call.
162
IBM xSeries User's Reference
A compatible monitor, keyboard, and mouse are required for many service
activities. Before you have the computer serviced, be sure to have these
components attached to your computer, either directly or through a console switch.
The following items are not covered:
Replacement or use of non-IBM parts or nonwarranted IBM parts
Note: All warranted parts contain a 7-character identification in the format IBM
FRU XXXXXXX.
Identification of software problem sources
Configuration of BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade
Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers
Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS)
Installation and maintenance of application programs
Refer to your IBM hardware warranty for a full explanation of IBM's warranty terms.
Before you call for service
Many computer problems can be solved without outside assistance, by using the
online help or by looking in the online or printed documentation that comes with
your computer or software. Also, be sure to read the information in any README
files that come with your software.
Most computers, operating systems, and application programs come with
documentation that contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error
messages. The documentation that comes with your computer also contains
information about the diagnostic tests you can perform.
If you receive a POST error code when you turn on your computer, refer to the
POST error-message charts in your hardware documentation. If you do not receive
a POST error code, but suspect a hardware problem, refer to the troubleshooting
information in your hardware documentation or run the diagnostic tests.
If you suspect a software problem, consult the documentation (including README
files) for the operating system or application program.
Getting customer support and service
Purchasing an IBM PC hardware product entitles you to standard help and support
during the warranty period. If you need additional support and services, a wide
variety of extended services are available for purchase that address almost any
need.
Using the World Wide Web
On the World Wide Web, the IBM Personal Computing Web site has up-to-date
information about IBM Personal Computer products and support. The address for
the IBM Personal Computing home page is:
http://www.ibm.com/pc
You can find support information for your IBM products, including supported
options, on the IBM Personal Computing Support page at:
Chapter 7. Getting help, service, and information
163
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support
If you select Profile from the support page, you can create a customized support
page that is specific to your hardware, complete with Frequently Asked Questions,
Parts Information, Technical Hints and Tips, and Downloadable Files. You will
have the information you need, all in one place. In addition, you can choose to
receive e-mail notifications whenever new information becomes available about
your registered products. You also can access online support forums, which are
community sites monitored by IBM support staff.
For information about specific Personal Computer products, visit the following
pages:
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/intellistation
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/ibmpc
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/eserver/xseries
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/thinkpad
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/accessories
http://www.direct.ibm.com/content/home/en_US/aptiva
You can select a country-specific Web site from these pages.
Using electronic support services
If you have a modem, you can get help from several popular services. Online
information services provide assistance through question-and-answer message
areas, live chat rooms, searchable databases, and more.
Technical information is available on a wide range of topics, such as:
Hardware setup and configuration
Preinstalled software
Windows, OS/2, and DOS
Networking
Communications
Multimedia
In addition, the latest device driver updates are available.
Commercial online services, such as America Online (AOL), contain information
about IBM products. (For AOL, use the keyword IBM.)
Getting information by fax
If you have a touch-tone telephone and access to a fax machine, in the U.S. and
Canada you can receive by fax marketing and technical information on many
topics, including hardware, operating systems, and local area networks (LANs).
You can call the IBM Automated Fax System 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Follow the recorded instructions, and the requested information will be sent to your
fax machine.
164
IBM xSeries User's Reference
In the U.S. and Canada, to access the IBM Automated Fax System, call
1-800-426-3395.
Getting help online
Online Housecall is a remote communication tool that allows an IBM
technical-support representative to access your PC by modem. Many problems
can be remotely diagnosed and corrected quickly and easily. In addition to a
modem, a remote-access application program is required. This service is not
available for servers. There might be a charge for this service, depending on the
request.
For more information about configuring your PC for Online Housecall:
In the U.S., call 1-800-772-2227.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3344.
In all other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
Getting help by telephone
During the warranty period, you can get help and information by telephone through
the IBM PC HelpCenter.
Please have the following information ready when you call:
Machine Type and Model
Serial numbers of your computer, monitor, and other components, or your proof
of purchase
Description of the problem
Exact wording of any error messages
Hardware and software configuration information for your system
If possible, be at your computer when you call.
In the U.S. and Canada, these services are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week. In the U.K., these services are available Monday through Friday, from 9:00
a.m. to 6:00 p.m.3
Country
3
Telephone number
Austria
Österreich
01-24 692 5901
Belgium - Dutch
Belgie
02-210 9820
Belgium - French
Belgique
02-210 9800
Canada
Toronto only
416-383-3344
Canada
Canada - all other
1-800-565-3344
Denmark
Danmark
35 25 02 91
Finland
Suomi
09-22 931 840
France
France
01 69 32 40 40
Response time will vary depending on the number and complexity of incoming calls.
Chapter 7. Getting help, service, and information
165
Country
Telephone number
Germany
Deutschland
069-6654 9040
Ireland
Ireland
01-815 9200
Italy
Italia
02-4827 5040
Luxembourg
Luxembourg
298-977 5063
Netherlands
Nederland
020-504 0501
Norway
Norge
23 05 32 40
Poland
Polska
00800-441 2261
Portugal
Portugal
21-791 51 47
Spain
España
91-662 49 16
Sweden
Sverige
08-751 52 27
Switzerland
Schweiz/Suisse/
Svizzera
0848-80 52 52
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
01475-555 055
U.S.A. and Puerto Rico
U.S.A. and Puerto Rico
1-800-772-2227
In all other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
Getting help around the world
If you travel with your computer or need to move it to another country, you can
register for International Warranty Service. When you register with the International
Warranty Service Office, you will receive an International Warranty Service
Certificate that is honored virtually worldwide, wherever IBM or IBM resellers sell
and service IBM PC products.
For more information or to register for International Warranty Service:
In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-497-7426.
In Europe, call 44-1475-893638 (Greenock, U.K.).
In Australia and New Zealand, call 61-2-9354-4171.
In all other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
Purchasing additional services
During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services, such as
support for IBM and non-IBM hardware, operating systems, and application
programs; network setup and configuration; upgraded or extended hardware repair
services; and custom installations. Service availability and name might vary by
country.
166
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Enhanced PC support line
Enhanced PC Support is available for desktop and mobile IBM computers that are
not connected to a network. Technical support is provided for IBM computers and
IBM or non-IBM options, operating systems, and application programs on the
Supported Products list.
This service includes technical support for:
Installing and configuring your out-of-warranty IBM computer
Installing and configuring non-IBM options in IBM computers
Using IBM operating systems in IBM and non-IBM computers
Using application programs and games
Tuning performance
Installing device drivers remotely
Setting up and using multimedia devices
Identifying system problems
Interpreting documentation
You can purchase this service on a per-call basis, as a multiple-incident package,
or as an annual contract with a 10-incident limit. For more information about
purchasing Enhanced PC Support, see “Ordering support line services” on
page 168.
900-number operating system and hardware support line
In the U.S., if you prefer to obtain technical support on a pay-as-you-go basis, you
can use the 900-number support line. The 900-number support line provides
support for IBM PC products that are out of the warranty period.
To access this support, call 1-900-555-CLUB (2582). You will be notified of the
charge per minute.
Network and server support line
Network and Server Support is available for simple or complex networks made up
of IBM servers and workstations using major network operating systems. In
addition, many popular non-IBM adapters and network interface cards are
supported.
This service includes all of the features of the Enhanced PC Support Line, plus:
Installing and configuring client workstations and servers
Identifying system problems and correcting problems on the client or the server
Using IBM and non-IBM network operating systems
Interpreting documentation
You can purchase this service on a per-call basis, as a multiple-incident package,
or as an annual contract with a 10-incident limit. For more information about
purchasing Network and Server Support, see “Ordering support line services” on
page 168.
Chapter 7. Getting help, service, and information
167
Ordering support line services
Enhanced PC Support Line and Network and Server Support Line services are
available for products on the Supported Products list. To receive a Supported
Products list:
In the U.S.:
1. Call 1-800-426-3395.
2. Select document number 11683 for Network and Server support.
3. Select document number 11682 for Enhanced PC support.
In Canada, contact IBM Direct at 1-800-465-7999, or:
1. Call 1-800-465-3299.
2. Select the HelpWare catalog.
In all other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
For more information or to purchase these services:
In the U.S., call 1-800-772-2227.
In Canada, call 1-800-465-7999.
In all other countries, contact your HelpCenter.
Warranty and repair services
You can upgrade your standard hardware warranty service or extend the service
beyond the warranty period.
Warranty upgrades in the U.S. include:
Carry-in service to on-site service
If your warranty provides carry-in repair service, you can upgrade to on-site
repair service, either standard or premium. The standard upgrade provides a
trained servicer within the next business day (9 a.m. to 5 p.m., local time,
Monday though Friday). The premium upgrade provides 4-hour average
response, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
On-site service to premium on-site service
If your warranty provides for on-site service, you can upgrade to premium
on-site service (4-hour average on-site response, 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week).
You also can extend your warranty. Warranty and Repair Services offers a variety
of post-warranty maintenance options, including ThinkPad EasyServ Maintenance
Agreements. Availability of the services varies by product.
For more information about warranty upgrades and extensions:
In the U.S., call 1-800-426-4968.
In Canada, call 1-800-465-7999.
In all other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
168
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Ordering publications
Additional publications are available for purchase from IBM. For a list of
publications available in your country:
In the U.S., Canada, and Puerto Rico, call 1-800-879-2755.
In other countries, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
Chapter 7. Getting help, service, and information
169
170
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Appendix A. Installing a server in a rack enclosure
This section provides instructions for installing a server in a rack.
Rack models of the xSeries 240 server come with all the rack installation hardware.
Review the preinstallation information in “Preparing to install the server in a rack
enclosure.”
10
CAUTION:
Do not place any object weighing more than 82 kg (180 lbs.) on top of
rack-mounted devices.
>82 kg (180 lbs)
During this procedure, you must install parts on the rack enclosure and the server.
This process can be divided in two parts:
Preparing the rack enclosure
Installing the server into the rack enclosure
Preparing to install the server in a rack enclosure
You will need the following items:
One rack mounting kit
– Two slide-rail assemblies
– One cable-management arm, including hitch pins
– One bag of screws and nuts
– Hook and loop fastener strips
– One installation template
– One packet of tie wraps
– Two wheel-shaped knobs
Flat-blade screwdriver
The documentation that comes with the rack
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
171
Before you begin
Before you begin to install your server in the rack, review the safety and
handling guidelines specified under “Safety information statements” on
page v, and “Electrical safety” on page 42.
To ensure rack stability, plan the installation of servers in the rack, starting
from the bottom. If you are installing different server models in the rack
enclosure, install the heaviest models in the lower part of the rack
enclosure.
Review the documentation that comes with your rack enclosure for safety or
cabling considerations. Ensure that your planned installation is within the
rack's guidelines for heat generation, electrical requirements, airflow, and
mechanical loading.
Verify that the rack can meet the operating parameters, as detailed in
“Features and specifications” on page 2.
Turn off the server, if it is on.
Preparing the rack enclosure
To attach the mounting hardware to the rack enclosure:
1. Mark the positions of the slide brackets and the cable-management arm on the
mounting rails of the rack enclosure.
a. Position the template on the front mounting rail, aligning the holes.
b. Mark the holes for the slide bracket cage nuts, using the dots supplied with
the template. Also mark the holes for the chassis bracket cage nuts.
c. Move the template to the rear mounting rails. Mark the locations for the
slide bracket cage nuts and the cable-management-arm mounting bracket.
Note: You must align the slide brackets correctly, or the installation cannot be
completed.
2. Install the cage nuts or clip nuts, as required for your rack enclosure, in the
marked positions.
172
IBM xSeries User's Reference
3. Attach the slide rails to the rack.
a. Insert the left slide-rail rear bracket pin into the hole between the two cage
nuts for the slide rail at the rear of the rack. The two holes in the rear
bracket line up with the cage nuts.
b. Pull the slide-rail front bracket to the front of the rack; insert the front
bracket pin into the hole above the cage nuts for the slide rail. The two
holes in the front bracket line up with the cage nuts.
c. Do the same for the other slide rail.
1
2
3
Left slide rail
Left rear
Left front
d. From the outside of the rack enclosure, insert two M6 by 16-mm screws
through each slide-rail bracket and cage nut; then, tighten the screws.
4. Attach the cable-management arm to the left rear of the rack enclosure.
a. Align the cable-management-arm mounting bracket with the cage nuts on
the rear mounting rail.
Appendix A. Installing a server in a rack enclosure
173
b. Insert two M6 by 16-mm screws to secure the mounting bracket to the rack.
1
2
3
4
5
Right rear
Left rear
Right front
Left front
Hitch pin
c. Attach the free end of the cable-management arm to the rear of the left
slide rail, using a hitch pin 5.
174
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Installing the server
To install the server in the rack enclosure:
1. Mount the server on the slide rails.
a. Extend the slide rails fully from the rack until the slide rails lock.
b. Rest the wheel-shaped knobs 1 on the slide rails at a point close to the
rack.
c. Lower the front of the server until the bottom notch in each chassis bracket
fits into the top notch in the slide rail end.
Slide the server backward or forward as necessary until the notches meet.
Appendix A. Installing a server in a rack enclosure
175
d. Attach the rails to the sides of the server with M4 by 5-mm screws.
2. Remove the wheel-shaped knobs from the server. Store the knobs in a safe
place to use if you need to remove the server from the rack at a later time.
3. Press the safety latches on the slide rails 1 and slide the server about
halfway into the rack enclosure.
Note: When the server is fully extended, safety latches on the slide rails lock
into place. This prevents the server from being accidentally pulled out
too far and dropped. To release the safety latch, press in.
176
IBM xSeries User's Reference
4. Attach the cables to the server.
a. Attach all cables to the corresponding connectors on the server.
b. Route the power cords, mouse cable, and keyboard cable through the
cable-restraint bracket.
c. Route all cables through the cable-management arm, attaching the cables
to the arm with the hook and loop fastener strips provided. The wraps are
provided for additional cable management.
5. Secure the server in the rack enclosure.
a. Slide the server into the rack enclosure until the side latches on the front
chassis brackets click into place.
b. Using a screwdriver, tighten the screws that hold the rear of the slide rails
to the rear of the rack.
Appendix A. Installing a server in a rack enclosure
177
c. Release the server and pull the server forward about halfway.
Note: To release the server, release the left and right side latches and
pull the server forward.
d. Using a screwdriver, tighten the screws that hold the front of the slide rails
to the front of the rack.
e. Slide the server into the rack enclosure again until the side latches on the
front chassis brackets click into place.
6. (Optional) For additional security, such as when transporting the rack, fasten
the server to the rack enclosure by inserting an M6 by 16-mm screw through
the chassis bracket, mounting rail, and cage nut on each side.
7. To complete the installation, refer to the documentation that comes with the
rack enclosure.
178
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Appendix B. Product warranties and notices
This chapter contains warranty and emission notices. It also contains trademarks
and general-information notices.
Warranty Statements
The warranty statements consist of two parts: Part 1 and Part 2. Part 1 varies by
country. Part 2 is the same for both statements. Be sure to read both the Part 1
that applies to your country and Part 2.
United States, Puerto Rico, and Canada (Z125-4753-05 11/97)
(Part 1 - General Terms on page 179)
Worldwide except Canada, Puerto Rico, Turkey, and United States
(Z125-5697-01 11/97)
(Part 1 - General Terms on page 181)
Worldwide Country-Unique Terms
(Part 2 - Country-Unique Terms on page 183)
IBM Statement of Limited Warranty for United States, Puerto Rico, and
Canada (Part 1 - General Terms)
This Statement of Limited Warranty includes Part 1 - General Terms and Part 2 - Country-unique Terms.
The terms of Part 2 may replace or modify those of Part 1. The warranties provided by IBM in this
Statement of Limited Warranty apply only to Machines you purchase for your use, and not for resale,
from IBM or your reseller. The term “Machine” means an IBM machine, its features, conversions,
upgrades, elements, or accessories, or any combination of them. The term “Machine” does not include
any software programs, whether pre-loaded with the Machine, installed subsequently or otherwise.
Unless IBM specifies otherwise, the following warranties apply only in the country where you acquire the
Machine. Nothing in this Statement of Warranty affects any statutory rights of consumers that cannot be
waived or limited by contract. If you have any questions, contact IBM or your reseller.
Machine - IBM
xSeries 240
Warranty Period* - Three Years
*Contact your place of purchase for warranty service information. Some
IBM Machines are eligible for On-site warranty service depending on the
country where service is performed.
The IBM Warranty for Machines
IBM warrants that each Machine 1) is free from defects in materials and workmanship and 2) conforms
to IBM's Official Published Specifications. The warranty period for a Machine is a specified, fixed period
commencing on its Date of Installation. The date on your sales receipt is the Date of Installation, unless
IBM or your reseller informs you otherwise.
During the warranty period IBM or your reseller, if approved by IBM to provide warranty service, will
provide repair and exchange service for the Machine, without charge, under the type of service
designated for the Machine and will manage and install engineering changes that apply to the Machine.
If a Machine does not function as warranted during the warranty period, and IBM or your reseller are
unable to either 1) make it do so or 2) replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent, you may
return it to your place of purchase and your money will be refunded. The replacement may not be new,
but will be in good working order.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
179
Extent of Warranty
The warranty does not cover the repair or exchange of a Machine resulting from misuse, accident,
modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, improper maintenance by you, or failure
caused by a product for which IBM is not responsible. The warranty is voided by removal or alteration
of Machine or parts identification labels.
THESE WARRANTIES ARE YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTIES AND REPLACE ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THESE
WARRANTIES GIVE YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE
OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION
TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
Items Not Covered by Warranty
IBM does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of a Machine.
Unless specified otherwise, IBM provides non-IBM machines WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY
KIND.
Any technical or other support provided for a Machine under warranty, such as assistance via telephone
with “how-to” questions and those regarding Machine set-up and installation, will be provided
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND.
Warranty Service
To obtain warranty service for the Machine, contact your reseller or IBM. In the United States, call IBM
at 1-800-772-2227. In Canada, call IBM at 1-800-565-3344. (In Toronto, call 416-383-3344.) You may
be required to present proof of purchase.
IBM or your reseller provides certain types of repair and exchange service, either at your location or at a
service center, to keep Machines in, or restore them to, conformance with their Specifications. IBM or
your reseller will inform you of the available types of service for a Machine based on its country of
installation. IBM may repair the failing Machine or exchange it at its discretion.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a Machine or part, the item IBM or your reseller
replaces becomes its property and the replacement becomes yours. You represent that all removed
items are genuine and unaltered. The replacement may not be new, but will be in good working order
and at least functionally equivalent to the item replaced. The replacement assumes the warranty service
status of the replaced item.
Any feature, conversion, or upgrade IBM or your reseller services must be installed on a Machine which
is 1) for certain Machines, the designated, serial-numbered Machine and 2) at an engineering-change
level compatible with the feature, conversion, or upgrade. Many features, conversions, or upgrades
involve the removal of parts and their return to IBM. A part that replaces a removed part will assume
the warranty service status of the removed part.
Before IBM or your reseller exchanges a Machine or part, you agree to remove all features, parts,
options, alterations, and attachments not under warranty service.
You also agree to
1. ensure that the Machine is free of any legal obligations or restrictions that prevent its exchange;
2. obtain authorization from the owner to have IBM or your reseller service a Machine that you do not
own; and
3. where applicable, before service is provided
a. follow the problem determination, problem analysis, and service request procedures that IBM or
your reseller provides,
b. secure all programs, data, and funds contained in a Machine,
c. provide IBM or your reseller with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to permit them
to fulfill their obligations, and
d. inform IBM or your reseller of changes in a Machine's location.
IBM is responsible for loss of, or damage to, your Machine while it is 1) in IBM's possession or 2) in
transit in those cases where IBM is responsible for the transportation charges.
180
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Neither IBM nor your reseller is responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary or personal
information contained in a Machine which you return to IBM or your reseller for any reason. You should
remove all such information from the Machine prior to its return.
Production Status
Each IBM Machine is manufactured from new parts, or new and used parts. In some cases, the
Machine may not be new and may have been previously installed. Regardless of the Machine's
production status, IBM's appropriate warranty terms apply.
Limitation of Liability
Circumstances may arise where, because of a default on IBM's part or other liability, you are entitled to
recover damages from IBM. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to
claim damages from IBM (including fundamental breach, negligence, misrepresentation, or other contract
or tort claim), IBM is liable for no more than
1. damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal
property; and
2. the amount of any other actual direct damages, up to the greater of U.S. $100,000 (or equivalent in
local currency) or the charges (if recurring, 12 months' charges apply) for the Machine that is the
subject of the claim.
This limit also applies to IBM's suppliers and your reseller. It is the maximum for which IBM, its
suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS IBM LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: 1)
THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES (OTHER THAN THOSE UNDER
THE FIRST ITEM LISTED ABOVE); 2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR
DATA; OR 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY
ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS),
EVEN IF IBM, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR
POSSIBILITY. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
IBM Statement of Warranty Worldwide except Canada, Puerto Rico,
Turkey, United States (Part 1 - General Terms)
This Statement of Warranty includes Part 1 - General Terms and Part 2 - Country-unique Terms. The
terms of Part 2 may replace or modify those of Part 1. The warranties provided by IBM in this
Statement of Warranty apply only to Machines you purchase for your use, and not for resale, from IBM
or your reseller. The term “Machine” means an IBM machine, its features, conversions, upgrades,
elements, or accessories, or any combination of them. The term “Machine” does not include any
software programs, whether pre-loaded with the Machine, installed subsequently or otherwise. Unless
IBM specifies otherwise, the following warranties apply only in the country where you acquire the
Machine. Nothing in this Statement of Warranty affects any statutory rights of consumers that cannot be
waived or limited by contract. If you have any questions, contact IBM or your reseller.
Machine - IBM
xSeries 240
Warranty Period* - Three Years
*Contact your place of purchase for warranty service information. Some
IBM Machines are eligible for On-site warranty service depending on the
country where service is performed.
The IBM Warranty for Machines
IBM warrants that each Machine 1) is free from defects in materials and workmanship and 2) conforms
to IBM's Official Published Specifications. The warranty period for a Machine is a specified, fixed period
commencing on its Date of Installation. The date on your sales receipt is the Date of Installation, unless
IBM or your reseller informs you otherwise.
Appendix B. Product warranties and notices
181
During the warranty period IBM or your reseller, if approved by IBM to provide warranty service, will
provide repair and exchange service for the Machine, without charge, under the type of service
designated for the Machine and will manage and install engineering changes that apply to the Machine.
If a Machine does not function as warranted during the warranty period, and IBM or your reseller are
unable to either 1) make it do so or 2) replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent, you may
return it to your place of purchase and your money will be refunded. The replacement may not be new,
but will be in good working order.
Extent of Warranty
The warranty does not cover the repair or exchange of a Machine resulting from misuse, accident,
modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, improper maintenance by you, or failure
caused by a product for which IBM is not responsible. The warranty is voided by removal or alteration
of Machine or parts identification labels.
THESE WARRANTIES ARE YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTIES AND REPLACE ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THESE
WARRANTIES GIVE YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE
OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION
TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
Items Not Covered by Warranty
IBM does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of a Machine.
Unless specified otherwise, IBM provides non-IBM machines WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY
KIND.
Any technical or other support provided for a Machine under warranty, such as assistance via telephone
with “how-to” questions and those regarding Machine set-up and installation, will be provided
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND.
Warranty Service
To obtain warranty service for the Machine, contact your reseller or IBM. You may be required to
present proof of purchase.
IBM or your reseller provides certain types of repair and exchange service, either at your location or at a
service center, to keep Machines in, or restore them to, conformance with their Specifications. IBM or
your reseller will inform you of the available types of service for a Machine based on its country of
installation. IBM may repair the failing Machine or exchange it at its discretion.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a Machine or part, the item IBM or your reseller
replaces becomes its property and the replacement becomes yours. You represent that all removed
items are genuine and unaltered. The replacement may not be new, but will be in good working order
and at least functionally equivalent to the item replaced. The replacement assumes the warranty service
status of the replaced item.
Any feature, conversion, or upgrade IBM or your reseller services must be installed on a Machine which
is 1) for certain Machines, the designated, serial-numbered Machine and 2) at an engineering-change
level compatible with the feature, conversion, or upgrade. Many features, conversions, or upgrades
involve the removal of parts and their return to IBM. A part that replaces a removed part will assume
the warranty service status of the removed part.
Before IBM or your reseller exchanges a Machine or part, you agree to remove all features, parts,
options, alterations, and attachments not under warranty service.
You also agree to
1. ensure that the Machine is free of any legal obligations or restrictions that prevent its exchange;
2. obtain authorization from the owner to have IBM or your reseller service a Machine that you do not
own; and
3. where applicable, before service is provided
182
IBM xSeries User's Reference
a. follow the problem determination, problem analysis, and service request procedures that IBM or
your reseller provides,
b. secure all programs, data, and funds contained in a Machine,
c. provide IBM or your reseller with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to permit them
to fulfil their obligations, and
d. inform IBM or your reseller of changes in a Machine's location.
IBM is responsible for loss of, or damage to, your Machine while it is 1) in IBM's possession or 2) in
transit in those cases where IBM is responsible for the transportation charges.
Neither IBM nor your reseller is responsible for any of your confidential, proprietary or personal
information contained in a Machine which you return to IBM or your reseller for any reason. You should
remove all such information from the Machine prior to its return.
Production Status
Each IBM Machine is manufactured from new parts, or new and used parts. In some cases, the
Machine may not be new and may have been previously installed. Regardless of the Machine's
production status, IBM's appropriate warranty terms apply.
Limitation of Liability
Circumstances may arise where, because of a default on IBM's part or other liability, you are entitled to
recover damages from IBM. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to
claim damages from IBM (including fundamental breach, negligence, misrepresentation, or other contract
or tort claim), IBM is liable for no more than
1. damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal
property; and
2. the amount of any other actual direct damages, up to the greater of U.S. $100,000 (or equivalent in
local currency) or the charges (if recurring, 12 months' charges apply) for the Machine that is the
subject of the claim.
This limit also applies to IBM's suppliers and your reseller. It is the maximum for which IBM, its
suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS IBM LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: 1)
THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES (OTHER THAN THOSE UNDER
THE FIRST ITEM LISTED ABOVE); 2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR
DATA; OR 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY
ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS),
EVEN IF IBM, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR
POSSIBILITY. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Part 2 - Worldwide Country-Unique Terms
ASIA PACIFIC
AUSTRALIA: The IBM Warranty for Machines: The following paragraph is added to this Section:
The warranties specified in this Section are in addition to any rights you may have under the Trade
Practices Act 1974 or other legislation and are only limited to the extent permitted by the applicable
legislation.
Extent of Warranty: The following replaces the first and second sentences of this Section:
The warranty does not cover the repair or exchange of a Machine resulting from misuse, accident,
modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, operation in other than the Specified
Operating Environment, improper maintenance by you, or failure caused by a product for which IBM is
not responsible.
Limitation of Liability: The following is added to this Section:
Where IBM is in breach of a condition or warranty implied by the Trade Practices Act 1974, IBM's
liability is limited to the repair or replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods. Where
that condition or warranty relates to right to sell, quiet possession or clear title, or the goods are of a
kind ordinarily acquired for personal, domestic or household use or consumption, then none of the
limitations in this paragraph apply.
Appendix B. Product warranties and notices
183
PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA: Governing Law: The following is added to this Statement:
The laws of the State of New York govern this Statement.
INDIA: Limitation of Liability: The following replaces items 1 and 2 of this Section:
1. liability for bodily injury (including death) or damage to real property and tangible personal property
will be limited to that caused by IBM's negligence;
2. as to any other actual damage arising in any situation involving nonperformance by IBM pursuant to,
or in any way related to the subject of this Statement of Warranty, IBM's liability will be limited to the
charge paid by you for the individual Machine that is the subject of the claim.
NEW ZEALAND: The IBM Warranty for Machines: The following paragraph is added to this Section:
The warranties specified in this Section are in addition to any rights you may have under the Consumer
Guarantees Act 1993 or other legislation which cannot be excluded or limited. The Consumer
Guarantees Act 1993 will not apply in respect of any goods which IBM provides, if you require the goods
for the purposes of a business as defined in that Act.
Limitation of Liability: The following is added to this Section:
Where Machines are not acquired for the purposes of a business as defined in the Consumer
Guarantees Act 1993, the limitations in this Section are subject to the limitations in that Act.
EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST, AFRICA (EMEA)
The following terms apply to all EMEA countries.
The terms of this Statement of Warranty apply to Machines purchased from an IBM reseller. If you
purchased this Machine from IBM, the terms and conditions of the applicable IBM agreement prevail
over this warranty statement.
Warranty Service
If you purchased an IBM Machine in Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany,
Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland or United Kingdom, you may obtain warranty service for that Machine in any of
those countries from either (1) an IBM reseller approved to perform warranty service or (2) from IBM.
If you purchased an IBM Personal Computer Machine in Albania, Armenia, Belarus, Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Czech Republic, Georgia, Hungary, Kazakhstan, Kirghizia, Federal
Republic of Yugoslavia, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia (FYROM), Moldova, Poland, Romania,
Russia, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, or Ukraine, you may obtain warranty service for that Machine in any
of those countries from either (1) an IBM reseller approved to perform warranty service or (2) from IBM.
The applicable laws, Country-unique terms and competent court for this Statement are those of the
country in which the warranty service is being provided. However, the laws of Austria govern this
Statement if the warranty service is provided in Albania, Armenia, Belarus, Bosnia and Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Croatia, Czech Republic, Federal Republic of Yugoslavia, Georgia, Hungary, Kazakhstan,
Kirghizia, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia (FYROM), Moldova, Poland, Romania, Russia,
Slovak Republic, Slovenia, and Ukraine.
The following terms apply to the country specified:
EGYPT: Limitation of Liability: The following replaces item 2 in this Section:
2. as to any other actual direct damages, IBM's liability will be limited to the total amount you paid for
the Machine that is the subject of the claim.
Applicability of suppliers and resellers (unchanged).
FRANCE: Limitation of Liability: The following replaces the second sentence of the first paragraph of
this Section:
In such instances, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from IBM, IBM is
liable for no more than: (items 1 and 2 unchanged).
GERMANY: The IBM Warranty for Machines: The following replaces the first sentence of the first
paragraph of this Section:
The warranty for an IBM Machine covers the functionality of the Machine for its normal use and the
Machine's conformity to its Specifications.
The following paragraphs are added to this Section:
The minimum warranty period for Machines is six months.
184
IBM xSeries User's Reference
In case IBM or your reseller are unable to repair an IBM Machine, you can alternatively ask for a partial
refund as far as justified by the reduced value of the unrepaired Machine or ask for a cancellation of the
respective agreement for such Machine and get your money refunded.
Extent of Warranty: The second paragraph does not apply.
Warranty Service: The following is added to this Section:
During the warranty period, transportation for delivery of the failing Machine to IBM will be at IBM's
expense.
Production Status: The following paragraph replaces this Section:
Each Machine is newly manufactured. It may incorporate in addition to new parts, re-used parts as well.
Limitation of Liability: The following is added to this Section:
The limitations and exclusions specified in the Statement of Warranty will not apply to damages caused
by IBM with fraud or gross negligence and for express warranty.
In item 2, replace “U.S. $100,000” with “1.000.000 DEM.”
The following sentence is added to the end of the first paragraph of item 2:
IBM's liability under this item is limited to the violation of essential contractual terms in cases of ordinary
negligence.
IRELAND: Extent of Warranty: The following is added to this Section:
Except as expressly provided in these terms and conditions, all statutory conditions, including all
warranties implied, but without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing all warranties implied by the
Sale of Goods Act 1893 or the Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act 1980 are hereby excluded.
Limitation of Liability: The following replaces items one and two of the first paragraph of this Section:
1. death or personal injury or physical damage to your real property solely caused by IBM's negligence;
and 2. the amount of any other actual direct damages, up to the greater of Irish Pounds 75,000 or 125
percent of the charges (if recurring, the 12 months' charges apply) for the Machine that is the subject of
the claim or which otherwise gives rise to the claim.
Applicability of suppliers and resellers (unchanged).
The following paragraph is added at the end of this Section:
IBM's entire liability and your sole remedy, whether in contract or in tort, in respect of any default shall
be limited to damages.
ITALY: Limitation of Liability: The following replaces the second sentence in the first paragraph:
In each such instance unless otherwise provided by mandatory law, IBM is liable for no more than: (item
1 unchanged) 2)as to any other actual damage arising in all situations involving non-performance by IBM
pursuant to, or in any way related to the subject matter of this Statement of Warranty, IBM's liability, will
be limited to the total amount you paid for the Machine that is the subject of the claim.
Applicability of suppliers and resellers (unchanged).
The following replaces the second paragraph of this Section:
Unless otherwise provided by mandatory law, IBM and your reseller are not liable for any of the
following: (items 1 and 2 unchanged) 3) indirect damages, even if IBM or your reseller is informed of
their possibility.
SOUTH AFRICA, NAMIBIA, BOTSWANA, LESOTHO AND SWAZILAND: Limitation of Liability: The
following is added to this Section:
IBM's entire liability to you for actual damages arising in all situations involving nonperformance by IBM
in respect of the subject matter of this Statement of Warranty will be limited to the charge paid by you
for the individual Machine that is the subject of your claim from IBM.
TURKIYE: Production Status: The following replaces this Section:
IBM fulfils customer orders for IBM Machines as newly manufactured in accordance with IBM's
production standards.
UNITED KINGDOM: Limitation of Liability: The following replaces items 1 and 2 of the first paragraph
of this Section:
1. death or personal injury or physical damage to your real property solely caused by IBM's negligence;
2. the amount of any other actual direct damages or loss, up to the greater of Pounds Sterling 150,000
or 125 percent of the charges (if recurring, the 12 months' charges apply) for the Machine that is the
subject of the claim or which otherwise gives rise to the claim.
Appendix B. Product warranties and notices
185
The following item is added to this paragraph:
3. breach of IBM's obligations implied by Section 12 of the Sale of Goods Act 1979 or Section 2 of the
Supply of Goods and Services Act 1982.
Applicability of suppliers and resellers (unchanged).
The following is added to the end of this Section:
IBM's entire liability and your sole remedy, whether in contract or in tort, in respect of any default will be
limited to damages.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA: Warranty Service: The following is added to this Section:
To obtain warranty service from IBM, call 1-800-565-3344. In Toronto, call 416-383-3344.
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA: Warranty Service: The following is added to this Section:
To obtain warranty service from IBM, call 1-800-772-2227.
ASIA PACIFIC
AUSTRALIA: The IBM Warranty for Machines: The following paragraph is added to this Section:
The warranties specified in this Section are in addition to any rights you may have under the Trade
Practices Act 1974 or other legislation and are only limited to the extent permitted by the applicable
legislation.
Extent of Warranty: The following replaces the first and second sentences of this Section:
The warranty does not cover the repair or exchange of a Machine resulting from misuse, accident,
modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, operation in other than the Specified
Operating Environment, improper maintenance by you, or failure caused by a product for which IBM is
not responsible.
Limitation of Liability: The following is added to this Section:
Where IBM is in breach of a condition or warranty implied by the Trade Practices Act 1974, IBM's
liability is limited to the repair or replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods. Where
that condition or warranty relates to right to sell, quiet possession or clear title, or the goods are of a
kind ordinarily acquired for personal, domestic or household use or consumption, then none of the
limitations in this paragraph apply.
PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA: Governing Law: The following is added to this Statement:
The laws of the State of New York govern this Statement.
INDIA: Limitation of Liability: The following replaces items 1 and 2 of this Section:
1. liability for bodily injury (including death) or damage to real property and tangible personal property
will be limited to that caused by IBM's negligence;
2. as to any other actual damage arising in any situation involving nonperformance by IBM pursuant to,
or in any way related to the subject of this Statement of Warranty, IBM's liability will be limited to the
charge paid by you for the individual Machine that is the subject of the claim.
NEW ZEALAND: The IBM Warranty for Machines: The following paragraph is added to this Section:
The warranties specified in this Section are in addition to any rights you may have under the Consumer
Guarantees Act 1993 or other legislation which cannot be excluded or limited. The Consumer
Guarantees Act 1993 will not apply in respect of any goods which IBM provides, if you require the goods
for the purposes of a business as defined in that Act.
Limitation of Liability: The following is added to this Section:
Where Machines are not acquired for the purposes of a business as defined in the Consumer
Guarantees Act 1993, the limitations in this Section are subject to the limitations in that Act.
EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST, AFRICA (EMEA)
The following terms apply to all EMEA countries.
The terms of this Statement of Warranty apply to Machines purchased from an IBM reseller. If you
purchased this Machine from IBM, the terms and conditions of the applicable IBM agreement prevail
over this warranty statement.
186
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Warranty Service
If you purchased an IBM Machine in Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany,
Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland or United Kingdom, you may obtain warranty service for that Machine in any of
those countries from either (1) an IBM reseller approved to perform warranty service or (2) from IBM.
If you purchased an IBM Personal Computer Machine in Albania, Armenia, Belarus, Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Czech Republic, Georgia, Hungary, Kazakhstan, Kirghizia, Federal
Republic of Yugoslavia, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia (FYROM), Moldova, Poland, Romania,
Russia, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, or Ukraine, you may obtain warranty service for that Machine in any
of those countries from either (1) an IBM reseller approved to perform warranty service or (2) from IBM.
The applicable laws, Country-unique terms and competent court for this Statement are those of the
country in which the warranty service is being provided. However, the laws of Austria govern this
Statement if the warranty service is provided in Albania, Armenia, Belarus, Bosnia and Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Croatia, Czech Republic, Federal Republic of Yugoslavia, Georgia, Hungary, Kazakhstan,
Kirghizia, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia (FYROM), Moldova, Poland, Romania, Russia,
Slovak Republic, Slovenia, and Ukraine.
The following terms apply to the country specified:
EGYPT: Limitation of Liability: The following replaces item 2 in this Section:
2. as to any other actual direct damages, IBM's liability will be limited to the total amount you paid for
the Machine that is the subject of the claim.
Applicability of suppliers and resellers (unchanged).
FRANCE: Limitation of Liability: The following replaces the second sentence of the first paragraph of
this Section:
In such instances, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from IBM, IBM is
liable for no more than: (items 1 and 2 unchanged).
GERMANY: The IBM Warranty for Machines: The following replaces the first sentence of the first
paragraph of this Section:
The warranty for an IBM Machine covers the functionality of the Machine for its normal use and the
Machine's conformity to its Specifications.
The following paragraphs are added to this Section:
The minimum warranty period for Machines is six months.
In case IBM or your reseller are unable to repair an IBM Machine, you can alternatively ask for a partial
refund as far as justified by the reduced value of the unrepaired Machine or ask for a cancellation of the
respective agreement for such Machine and get your money refunded.
Extent of Warranty: The second paragraph does not apply.
Warranty Service: The following is added to this Section:
During the warranty period, transportation for delivery of the failing Machine to IBM will be at IBM's
expense.
Production Status: The following paragraph replaces this Section:
Each Machine is newly manufactured. It may incorporate in addition to new parts, re-used parts as well.
Limitation of Liability: The following is added to this Section:
The limitations and exclusions specified in the Statement of Warranty will not apply to damages caused
by IBM with fraud or gross negligence and for express warranty.
In item 2, replace “U.S. $100,000” with “1.000.000 DEM.”
The following sentence is added to the end of the first paragraph of item 2:
IBM's liability under this item is limited to the violation of essential contractual terms in cases of ordinary
negligence.
IRELAND: Extent of Warranty: The following is added to this Section:
Except as expressly provided in these terms and conditions, all statutory conditions, including all
warranties implied, but without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing all warranties implied by the
Sale of Goods Act 1893 or the Sale of Goods and Supply of Services Act 1980 are hereby excluded.
Limitation of Liability: The following replaces items one and two of the first paragraph of this Section:
Appendix B. Product warranties and notices
187
1. death or personal injury or physical damage to your real property solely caused by IBM's negligence;
and 2. the amount of any other actual direct damages, up to the greater of Irish Pounds 75,000 or 125
percent of the charges (if recurring, the 12 months' charges apply) for the Machine that is the subject of
the claim or which otherwise gives rise to the claim.
Applicability of suppliers and resellers (unchanged).
The following paragraph is added at the end of this Section:
IBM's entire liability and your sole remedy, whether in contract or in tort, in respect of any default shall
be limited to damages.
ITALY: Limitation of Liability: The following replaces the second sentence in the first paragraph:
In each such instance unless otherwise provided by mandatory law, IBM is liable for no more than: (item
1 unchanged) 2)as to any other actual damage arising in all situations involving non-performance by IBM
pursuant to, or in any way related to the subject matter of this Statement of Warranty, IBM's liability, will
be limited to the total amount you paid for the Machine that is the subject of the claim.
Applicability of suppliers and resellers (unchanged).
The following replaces the second paragraph of this Section:
Unless otherwise provided by mandatory law, IBM and your reseller are not liable for any of the
following: (items 1 and 2 unchanged) 3) indirect damages, even if IBM or your reseller is informed of
their possibility.
SOUTH AFRICA, NAMIBIA, BOTSWANA, LESOTHO AND SWAZILAND: Limitation of Liability: The
following is added to this Section:
IBM's entire liability to you for actual damages arising in all situations involving nonperformance by IBM
in respect of the subject matter of this Statement of Warranty will be limited to the charge paid by you
for the individual Machine that is the subject of your claim from IBM.
TURKIYE: Production Status: The following replaces this Section:
IBM fulfils customer orders for IBM Machines as newly manufactured in accordance with IBM's
production standards.
UNITED KINGDOM: Limitation of Liability: The following replaces items 1 and 2 of the first paragraph
of this Section:
1. death or personal injury or physical damage to your real property solely caused by IBM's negligence;
2. the amount of any other actual direct damages or loss, up to the greater of Pounds Sterling 150,000
or 125 percent of the charges (if recurring, the 12 months' charges apply) for the Machine that is the
subject of the claim or which otherwise gives rise to the claim.
The following item is added to this paragraph:
3. breach of IBM's obligations implied by Section 12 of the Sale of Goods Act 1979 or Section 2 of the
Supply of Goods and Services Act 1982.
Applicability of suppliers and resellers (unchanged).
The following is added to the end of this Section:
IBM's entire liability and your sole remedy, whether in contract or in tort, in respect of any default will be
limited to damages.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA: Warranty Service: The following is added to this Section:
To obtain warranty service from IBM, call 1-800-565-3344. In Toronto, call 416-383-3344.
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA: Warranty Service: The following is added to this Section:
To obtain warranty service from IBM, call 1-800-772-2227.
Notices
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply
that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates.
Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or
imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Subject to
IBM’s valid intellectual property or other legally protectable rights, any functionally
188
IBM xSeries User's Reference
equivalent product, program, or service may be used instead of the IBM product,
program, or service. The evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with
other products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the responsibility of
the user.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in
this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to
these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
This section contains trademarks, electronic emission notices, and other important
information.
Any references in this publication to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this
IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
Edition Notice
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some
jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication
at any time.
This publication was developed for products and services offered in the United
States of America and the United Kingdom. It is possible that this publication may
contain reference to, or information about, IBM products (machines and programs),
programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references
or information must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such
IBM products, programming, or services in your country.
Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM
reseller or IBM marketing representative.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any
means without prior permission in writing from the International Business Machines
Corporation.
Appendix B. Product warranties and notices
189
Processing date data
This IBM hardware product and IBM software products that might be packaged with
it have been designed, when used in accordance with their associated
documentation, to process date data correctly within and between the 20th and
21st centuries, provided all other products (for example, software, hardware, and
firmware) used with these products properly exchange accurate date data with
them.
IBM cannot take responsibility for the date data processing capabilities of non-IBM
products, even if those products are preinstalled or otherwise distributed by IBM.
You should contact the vendors responsible for those products directly to determine
the capabilities of their products and update them if needed. This IBM hardware
product cannot prevent errors that might occur if software, upgrades, or peripheral
devices you use or exchange data with do not process date data correctly.
The foregoing is a Year 2000 Readiness Disclosure.
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or
other countries or both:
IBM
HelpCenter
HelpWare
OS/2
IntelliStation
Netfinity
Active PCI
Light Path Diagnostics
Predictive Failure Analysis
ServeRAID
ServerGuide
ServerProven
SurePath
ThinkPad
xSeries
Lotus and Domino are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lotus Development
Corporation.
Oracle, Oracle8, and Oracle Web Application Server are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Oracle Corporation.
Intel, MMX, Pentium, and Pentium II Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Intel Corporation.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, INC. in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed
exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.
Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks
of others.
190
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Important notes
Processor speeds indicate the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other
factors also affect application performance.
When referring to hard disk drive capacity, MB stands for 1 000 000 bytes and GB
stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible capacity may vary depending
on operating environments.
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest
currently supported drives available from IBM.
Unless otherwise stated, IBM makes no representations or warranties with respect
to non-IBM products. Support (if any) for the non-IBM products is provided by the
third party, not IBM.
Some software may differ from its retail version (if available), and may not include
user manuals or all program functionality.
Electronic emission notices
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Appendix B. Product warranties and notices
191
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement
Notice to Customers
This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for
indirect connection to public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.
European community directive conformance statement
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electro-magnetic compatibility.
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
Taiwan electrical emission statement
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement
192
IBM xSeries User's Reference
Index
Numerics
1-800 telephone assistance 157, 165
100BASE-TX transceiver 97
10BASE-T transceiver 97
16-bit
cable required 69, 90
connector on SCSI backplane 69
SCSI IDs supported 69
2-drop SCSI cable 69
25-pin parallel port 12
9-pin serial port 12
9-pin-to-25-pin adapter 12
900 number support 167
A
about this book ix
AC Power light 14
accessing
Configuration/Setup Utility program 20, 25
SCSISelect Utility program 32
acoustical emission values 3
activity light, hard disk drive 8
adapter
bus-master 53
compatibility 55
considerations 55
deactivated 31
Ethernet, configuring 35
hot-plug 53
installation sequence 30
installing
general information 53
hot-plug 56
non-hot-plug 60
network, compatibility with device drivers 61
PCI locations 53
RAID 61
requirements 53
slot locations 53
starting from 27
types 53
using, with external devices 90
video 53, 151
working with 53
adding
adapter
general information 53
hot-plug 56
non-hot-plug 60
external options 90, 91
 Copyright IBM Corp. 2000
adding (continued)
hot-swap fan assembly 83
internal drive 67, 68
memory 65
power supply 79
address
COM port 92
parallel port 93
registering your server 1
server product information 1
USB 98
adjusting
chair 17
controls 17
lighting 18
monitor 17
administrator password
deleting 26
features 23
forgotten 25
purpose 25
setting 26
Advanced Setup
Advanced System Management Processor (system
service processor) 29
cache control 28
memory settings 29
PCI slot/device information 28
system service processor 29
Advanced System Management Interconnect
knockout 11
advanced system management interconnect port 2
Advanced System Management Processor 29
connector 12
description 5
time configuration 23
advantages of product 1, 68
air circulation
around server 17, 18
rack guidelines 172
air vents 18
allocating system resources 28
altitude, server 3
America Online 164
antiglare filter 18
application processor 62
architecture, PCI 28, 53
arranging workspace 17
assistance 162
Attention LEDs for hot-plug PCI slots 54
Attention lights for hot-plug PCI slots 12
193
Australian electronic emission Class A notice
auxiliary-device connector 12
availability 6
B
back view 11
backing up all files 34
backplane
SCSI, connections to bays 69
banks, memory 65
battery
disposal vii, 157
failure error message 113
handling precautions vii, 157
heavy metal 157
installing 158
location 158
ordering replacements 157
removing 158
replacing 157
bays
drive types and sizes 68
expansion 67, 68
general information
installing drives 68, 70
preinstallation steps 70
hot-swap 73
identification 68
installing a drive in a hot-swap 73
internal drive locations 68
locations 68
non-hot-swap
installing a drive in 71
preinstalled CD-ROM drive 68
beep codes
description 122
during POST 109, 122
list 124
table 124
before you begin 41
bezel
installing 86, 89
removing 51
BIOS (basic input/output system)
blank screen 144
boot
See startup
boot processor 62
broken cover lock 144
bus
PCI 55
bus master
adapters 53
capability 11
194
IBM xSeries User's Reference
192
bypassing power-on password
24, 103
C
cables
2-drop SCSI 69
category 5 35, 97, 148
connecting
before installing adapter 59, 60
safety requirements vi
to a non-hot-swap drive 72
to an adapter 59, 61
connector on SCSI backplane 69
crossover 148
disconnecting
from back of server 42, 47
from electrical outlets 42, 47
from external receptacles 42
safety requirements vi
for bidirectional parallel ports 23
lengths 18
list of available power cables 14
maximum lengths for SCSI devices 90
power vi, 14
removing 47
requirements
attaching external devices 97
Fast Ethernet 35
requirements for attaching external devices 90
safety vi
SCSI 90
cache
control 28
Level-2 size
cache control 28
cage nut
calculating maximum SCSI cable lengths 90
Canadian electronic emission Class A notice 192
card
See adapter
Category 5 cables 35, 97, 148
caution
battery handling vii, 157
handling static-sensitive devices 44
laser compliance statement viii
lifting the server 1, 47
power 9
rack model 171
removing cover 42
removing covers 42
CD
cleaning 143
eject/load button 8
CD-ROM drive
in-use light 8
laser compliance statement viii
CD-ROM drive (continued)
locations 68
manual tray-release opening 8
preinstalled 67, 68
problems 143
sizes 68
chair adjustments 17
changing
configuration settings 21
hardware configuration 151
jumper positions 103
memory addresses 31
port assignments 22, 92, 93
SCSI controller settings 32
software configuration 151
termination on SCSI devices 70
channels, SCSI 90
channels, ServeRAID
circulation, air 18
Class A electronic emission notice 191—192
cleaning the monitor 18
clock
real-time 113
comfort 17
communication
requirements vi
communication port 92
compatibility
adapter 53, 55
completing the installation 85
configuration
adapter conflicts 151
adapter installation sequence 30
changing hardware 151
changing software 151
Configuration/Setup Utility program 20
conflicts 30, 151
default settings
load default settings 29
device change 114
EEPROM 20
errors 20
Ethernet adapter 35
Ethernet controller 35
Ethernet failover
IntraNetWare 38
OS/2 36
Windows NT Server 37, 38
hardware change 125
memory change 114
memory-address conflicts 151
option conflicts 151
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) 28
power-on self-test (POST) 19
restoring 21, 29
Universal Serial Bus (USB) 23
configuration (continued)
utility programs 19
Configuration/Setup Utility program
administrator password 25
configuring devices 22
configuring I/O ports 22
controlling access to 25
defining system security 23
main menu 21
power-on password 24
setting Advanced System Management Processor
time 23
setting date and time 23
setting passwords 23, 25
setting service processor time 23
starting 20
configure/view host adapter settings 32
configuring your server 19, 90
conflicts, configuration 30, 151
connecting
adapter 53
cables
requirements for external devices 90
external options 90, 91
internal drives, all bays 67, 68
connectors
Advanced System Management Interconnect 11
auxiliary device 95
descriptions 11
Ethernet 12, 97
expansion slots 53
input/output 91
input/output locations 11
keyboard 12, 94
management port C 12, 92
memory 65, 66
monitor 12
mouse 12
parallel device 12
parallel port 93
pointing device 12
power 12, 14
printer 12
rear view of server 11
SCSI 12, 96
serial device 12
serial port 92
systems management port 92
Universal Serial Bus (USB) 98
Universal Serial Bus 1 12
Universal Serial Bus 2 12
USB 1 12
USB 2 12
video 12, 94
considerations
cable requirements 90
Index
195
considerations (continued)
environmental 157
installing
adapters 55
external SCSI devices
internal drives 68
controller
Ethernet 35, 97, 136
Ethernet, problems 148
network 97
SCSI 32
video 53, 151
controls
devices supported 90
front panel 7
server 7
cord, power 14
core chipset control 28
cover
rack
installing 85
removing 49
tower
installing 88
removing 48
cover lock, broken 144
CPU LED 154
customer assistance
error messages 109
90
D
daisy-chain cable 11
damaged system
DASD (direct access storage device)
See drive
See hard disk drive
date and time 23
date data, processing 190
date, setting 23
DC Power light 14
deactivated adapters 31
deep adapters 55
default
settings, default 29
defective hard disk drive 76
deleting
power-on password 103
deleting administrator password 26
deleting power-on password 24, 25
description
drive 67, 68
hot-swap drive 68
integrated video controller 53
SCSI IDs 69
196
IBM xSeries User's Reference
design considerations 1
device
configuration error 114
drivers, compatibility with network adapters
external 90
mouse problems 145
number supported 90
pointing device problems 145
port assignments 22
preinstalled 67, 68
resources 28
SCSI 69
startup sequence 27
static-sensitive, handling 44
device records, updating 90
diagnosing server problems 143
diagnostic log, viewing 112
diagnostic utility programs
equipment 111
error messages 125
messages, error 125
running 111
starting 111
diagnostics
description, test programs 107
error messages 109
light path 153
POST (power-on self-test) 109
POST beep codes 109
tools overview 107
DIMM 65
disabling
Ethernet controller 28
hot-plug PCI slot 56
PCI slot 28
SCSI controller 28
video controller 28
disconnecting
cables
before installing options 47
hot-swap drives 76
power supply 81
disk utility, SCSI 33
diskette drives
eject button 8
in-use light 8
installing 71
preinstalled 67
problems 30, 143
sizes 68
diskettes, option 110
display
See monitor
disposing of batteries vii, 157
DMA (direct memory access)
resources 28
61
door
installing 87
removing 50
door lock 2
drive
bays 68
description 67, 68
full-high 68
half-high 68
hot-swap 68
identification 68
installation hardware for 68
installation requirements 68
installing
all bays 67, 68, 70
hot-swap 73
removable media 71
location
by drive type 68
illustration 68
non-hot-swap 70
position 70
preinstalled 67, 68
removing a hot-swap 76
SCSI 69
setting switches and jumpers 70
sizes 68
status indicators 8
types 67, 68
drivers
compatibility with network adapters 61
software conflicts 31
dual inline memory module (DIMM) 65
See also memory-module kits
E
eject switch
CD-ROM 8
diskette drive 8
electrical outlets 18
electrical safety vi, 42
electromagnetic interference (EMI) 68
electronic emission Class A notice 191, 192
electronic support 164
enabling
Ethernet controller 28
PCI slot 28
SCSI controller 28
video controller 28
enhanced parallel port (EPP) 22
environmental considerations 157
error logs 110
error messages
Advanced System Management Processor diagnostic
(165) 131
error messages (continued)
battery failure 113
CD-ROM diagnostic (215) 134
core system diagnostic (001) 127
description 109
device configuration 114
diagnostic 110, 125
diskette drive diagnostic (206) 134
Ethernet 136
Ethernet diagnostic (301) 135
Ethernet diagnostic (302) 135
Ethernet diagnostic (405) 135
event/error logs 29
hard disk drive diagnostic (217) 134
magnetic tape drive diagnostic (264) 134
memory configuration 114
microprocessor diagnostic (089) 130
modem diagnostic (415) 136
NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) device driver 139
NDIS 4.0 device driver 140
NetWare or IntraNetWare ODI device driver
numeric 112
parallel port diagnostic (014) 127
PCI interface diagnostic (020) 128
POST 112
POST messages 110
power supply diagnostic (075) 130
RAID diagnostic (035) 128
SCO UNIX device driver 141
SCSI interface diagnostic (030) 128
serial port diagnostic (011) 127
software-generated 110
status display diagnostic (180) 132
system cache diagnostic (202) 133
system memory diagnostic (201) 132
thermal system diagnostic (175) 131
types 109
USB port interface diagnostic (015) 127
video system diagnostic (005) 127
Ethernet adapter
configuring 35
redundant 35
Ethernet controller
configuration 35
connector 12, 97
disabling 28
error messages 136
failover feature 35
NIC 35
primary controller 35
redundant adapter 35
SCO UNIX device driver messages 141
secondary controller 35
troubleshooting 148
Ethernet Link Status light 10, 149, 150
136
Index
197
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps light 10, 149
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity light 10, 149, 150
European Community electronic emission Class A
notice 192
event/error logs 29
exiting from the Configuration/Setup Utility
program 21, 29
expansion bays 67, 68
expansion enclosure problems 148
expansion slots
adapter installation 60
adapter locations 53
description 53
hot-swap PCI adapter installation 56
location 11, 12
extended capabilities port (ECP) 22
extension cords 18
external
options, connecting 90, 91
SCSI 12
SCSI cable
maximum lengths 90
using 90
SCSI connector
rules for using 90
SCSI device IDs 90
views 11, 67
F
failed hard disk drive 76
failover for Ethernet
configuration for 36
description 35
NIC adapter 35
primary controller 35
secondary controller 35
FAN 1 LED 156
FAN 2 LED 156
FAN 3 LED 156
fan assembly, hot-swap 83
Fast Ethernet 35
fatigue 17
fax, getting information by 164
FCC Class A notice 191
features
administrator password 25
front view 67
hot-swap drives 68
PCI, configuring 28
rear view 11
features and specification 2
features, server 2
fee services 166
filler panel
cooling considerations 45
198
IBM xSeries User's Reference
filler panel (continued)
hot-swap drive bay 75
non-hot-swap drive bay 71, 72
power supply bay 14
fixed disk
See hard disk drive
flickering monitor 144
forgotten administrator password 25
forgotten power-on password 24
format, low-level 34
formatting drives 34
front panel controls 7
front view 67
full-high drives 68
G
general information
before installing options 41
controls 7
expansion bays 67
features 2
input/output connectors 11
installing drives 68, 70
specifications, server 3
status indicators 10
general problems 144
glare 17
guidelines for working inside the server with the power
on 44
H
half-high drives 68
handling static-sensitive devices 44
hard disk drive
activity light 8
arrays, reconfiguring after installing hard disk
drives 75
backplane 68
consequences of removing wrong drive 76
HDD LED 155
hot-swap 68
ID, SCSI 69
installing 73
low-level format 34
removing 76
replacing 76
sizes 68
status indicators 8
Status light 8
types 68
Hard Drive Activity light 10
hardfile
See hard disk drive
hardware installation 70
HDD LED 155
heat output of server 3
heavy-metal batteries 157
help 162
See also customer assistance
highlights 1
home page, IBM Personal Computer 161
home page, IBM Personal Computing 163
hot plug
adapter
Ethernet failover
Windows NT Server setup 37
hot-plug PCI adapters 53
Hot-plug PCI slot LEDs 54
hot-swap fan assembly 83
hot-swap parts
advantage 68
description 68
drive
See drive
fan
See fan assembly, hot-swap
power supply
See power supply, hot-swap
humidity, server environment 3
I
I/O board data 22
I/O ports 22, 28
IJO-compliant statement 55
IBM Ethernet controller 35
IBM service center
See telephone numbers, IBM
important notes 191
in-use lights
diskette drive 143
problems 144
indicator lights
See lights
Industry Canada electronic emission Class A
notice 192
Information light 10
input/output (I/O) connectors
See connectors
installation
completing 85
hardware 41, 68, 70
preparation 41
preparing for 46
requirements 68
installing
adapters
general information 53
hot-plug 56
non-hot-plug 60
installing (continued)
battery 158
cover 85
DIMM 65
door 87
external options 90, 91
hard disk drives 71, 73
hot-swap drives 68
hot-swap fan assembly 83
internal drives
all bays 68
considerations 68
general information 67, 68
hot-swap 73
left front bay 71
locations 68
preinstallation steps 70
SCSI 69
types and sizes for each bay 68
internal options 41
memory-module kits 65
microprocessor kit 62
network adapters 61
non-hot-swap drives 71
Option Diskettes 110
power supply 79
RAID adapter 61
SCSI drives
server door 87
top cover 85
trim bezel 86, 89
intermittent problems 145
internal
drives
considerations 68
installing (all bays) 68
installing (general information) 67, 68
installing (hot-swap) 73
installing (non-hot-swap drive) 71
locations 68
removing (hot-swap) 76
replacing (hot-swap) 76
SCSI 69
sizes 68
maximum SCSI cable lengths 90
preinstalled 67, 68
SCSI devices, terminating 70
setting jumpers 70
international warranty service 166
Internet home page 161, 163
interrupt 28
interrupt levels, assigning (PCI) 28
interrupt request (IRQ)
introduction 1
Index
199
J
jumpers
changing 103
locations
on processor board 101
microprocessor core-frequency-selection
on internal drives 70
on processor board 101, 102
on system board 100
101
K
keyboard
angle of 17
arm and wrist position 17
connector 12, 94
number lock 27
port 12, 94
problems 145
speed 27
keyboard, connector 2
keys
knockout for external connector
11
L
laser compliance statement viii
LEDs (light-emitting diode)
Attention lights for hot-plug PCI slots 12, 54
CPU 153, 154
diagnostic LED panel 153
Ethernet Link Status 10, 149, 150
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps 10, 149
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity 10, 149, 150
FAN 1 153, 156
FAN 2 153, 156
FAN 3 153, 156
for hot-plug PCI slots 54
for hot-swap drives 76
HDD 153, 155
identifying problems 151
Information 10
MEMORY 153, 154
NMI 153, 155
NON REDUNDANT 153
operator information panel 8
PCI BUS A 153, 155
PCI BUS B 153, 155
Power lights for hot-plug PCI slots 54
power supply 152
POWER SUPPLY 1 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY 2 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY 3 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY NON REDUNDANT 153, 156
Processor 1 Activity 10
Processor 2 Activity 10
200
IBM xSeries User's Reference
LEDs (light-emitting diode) (continued)
processor board 101
SCSI Hard Drive Activity 10
SERVICE PROCESSOR BUS 153, 156
SMI 153, 156
system board 99
System Error 10, 154, 155, 156, 157
System POST Complete 10
System Power 10
TEMPERATURE 153, 157
VRM 153, 154
lifting the server, caution 1
light path diagnostics 153
lighting 17
lights
Attention for hot-plug PCI slots 12, 54
CD-ROM Drive In-Use 8
CPU 153, 154
diagnostic LED panel 153
Diskette Drive In-Use 8
Ethernet Link Status 10, 149, 150
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps 10, 149
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity 10, 149, 150
FAN 1 153, 156
FAN 2 153, 156
FAN 3 153, 156
Hard Disk Activity 8
hard disk drive status 8
Hard Disk Status 8
HDD 153, 155
identifying problems 151
Information 10
MEMORY 153, 154
NMI 153, 155
NON REDUNDANT 153
not working 144
operator information panel 10
PCI BUS A 153, 155
PCI BUS B 153, 155
power supply 152
POWER SUPPLY 1 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY 2 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY 3 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY NON REDUNDANT 153, 156
power-supply status 14
Processor 1 Activity 10
Processor 2 Activity 10
SCSI Hard Drive Activity 10
SERVICE PROCESSOR BUS 153, 156
SMI 153, 156
System Error 10, 154, 155, 156, 157
System POST Complete 10
System Power 10
TEMPERATURE 153, 157
VRM 153, 154
load default settings 29
locations
adapters 53
battery 158
bays 68
expansion slots 53
features 11, 67
internal drives 68
jumpers
processor board 101
memory 65
memory-module kits 65
processor-board jumpers 102
processor-board switches 102
System Power light 10
system-board jumpers 100
termination 70
lock, cover 144
loss of data 76
Low-Level Format program
backing up files 34
overview 34
using 34
when to use 34
M
main menu, Configuration/Setup Utility 21
management port C 92
management port C connector 12
manual tray-release opening for CD-ROM drive 8
maximum SCSI cable lengths 90
mechanical loading, rack 172
media types 68
media-bay trim bezel
installing 86, 89
removing 51
memory
address conflicts 151
bank 65
configuration error 114
problems 146
resources 28
specifications 65
MEMORY LED 154
memory settings 29
memory-module kits 65
menu, Configuration/Setup Utility program
Configuration/Setup Utility 21
configure/view host adapter settings 32
SCSI disk utilities 33
SCSISelect Utility 32
messages
Advanced System Management Processor
diagnostic (165) 131
Advanced System Management Processor diagnostic
(165) 131
messages (continued)
battery failure 113
CD-ROM diagnostic (215) 134
core system diagnostic (001) 127
device configuration error 114
diagnostic 125
diskette drive diagnostic (206) 134
error 125
Ethernet diagnostic (301) 135
Ethernet diagnostic (302) 135
Ethernet diagnostic (405) 135
hard disk drive diagnostic (217) 134
magnetic tape drive diagnostic (264) 134
memory configuration error 114
microprocessor diagnostic (089) 130
modem diagnostic (415) 136
parallel port diagnostic (014) 127
PCI interface diagnostic (020) 128
POST 112
power supply diagnostic (075) 130
RAID diagnostic (035) 128
SCSI interface diagnostic (030) 128
serial port diagnostic (011) 127
status display diagnostic (180) 132
system cache diagnostic (202) 133
system memory diagnostic (201) 132
thermal system diagnostic (175) 131
USB port interface diagnostic (015) 127
video system diagnostic (005) 127
microprocessor 2
application 62
boot 62
installing 62
locations 64
problems 145
startup 145
microprocessor core-frequency-selection jumper
block 101
modem 92
monitor
adjusting of 17
connector 12
controller 53
dusting of 18
placement of 17
problems 144
signal cable 12
monitor, connector 2
mouse
connector 12, 95
port 95
problems 145
mouse, connector 2
moving the server 1
multiple function PCI adapters 28
Index
201
N
NDIS device driver messages 140
network
adapter, starting from 27
connection problems 148
Ethernet 35
Ethernet connector 97
Ethernet device driver 136
network adapter compatibility with device drivers
network and server support services, fee 167
network interface card 35
NIC adapter 35
NMI LED 155
NON REDUNDANT LED 156
non-hot-swap drives, installing 71
non-hot-swappable drives
installing 70
setting jumpers 70
nonremovable media 68
nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM)
configuration
notices
battery vii
electronic emission, Class A 191, 192
electronic emission, Class A, Australian 192
FCC, Class A 191
laser compliance statement viii
miscellaneous 191
product 188
safety information v, 42
Taiwan electrical emission 192
trademarks 190
Novell NetWare/IntraNetWare messages 136
O
occasional problems 145
office space, arranging 17
Online Housecall 165
online information services 164
operating system
installing using ServerGuide CDs 5
setup required for NIC adapter 36
support of hot-plug PCI adapters 4, 53
operator information panel 8, 10
option diskettes, copying 110
options
configuring 30
diskettes 110
external, connecting 90, 91
installation preparation 46
installing 41
internal
adapter 53
DIMM 65
drives 68
202
IBM xSeries User's Reference
61
options (continued)
internal (continued)
memory-module kits 65
PCI, configuring 28
problems 146
SCSISelect Utility program 32
ordering
replacement batteries 157
SCSI cable 90
ordering support line services 168
OS/2
See operating system
output ports 11
overview
adapter installation considerations
diagnostic programs 107, 110
diagnostic tools 107
electrical safety 42
installing
external options 90
internal drives 68
microprocessors 62
POST (power-on self-test) 109
preparing to install options 46
problems, solving 107
solving problems 107
troubleshooting charts 110
55
P
parallel port 2
assignment 22
bidirectional 22
configuration 22
connector 93
enhanced parallel port (EPP) 22
extended capabilities port (ECP) 22
location 12
port 93
problems 146
part numbers
password
administrator 23, 25
forgotten administrator 25
general information 23
not set 23
power-on 24, 103
setting 26
PC support services, fee 167
PCI (peripheral component interconnect) architecture
adapter configuration 30
adapter locations 53
adapters 53
assigning interrupt levels 28
expansion slot numbers 53
expansion slots 11, 12
PCI (peripheral component interconnect) architecture
(continued)
features and options 28
installation 56, 60
locations 53
slot numbers 99
PCI BUS A LED 155
PCI BUS B LED 155
Pentium III microprocessor 62
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) architecture
See PCI (peripheral component interconnect)
architecture
phone numbers
See telephone numbers, IBM
pin-number assignments
auxiliary-device port 95
Ethernet connector 97
keyboard port 94
parallel port 93
SCSI port 96
serial port 92
universal serial bus connectors 98
video port 94
planning workspace 17
pointing device
See also mouse
problems 145
ports, input/output
See also connectors
Advanced System Management Interconnect 11
assignments, changing 22
Ethernet 12
keyboard 12
management port C 12
monitor 12
mouse 12
parallel 12
See also parallel port
printer 12
SCSI 12, 90
serial
See serial port
serial (USB 1) 12
serial A 12
serial B 12
video 12
POST
See power-on self-test (POST)
POST Complete light 10
power
AC Power light 14
connector 12, 14
Control button 8
DC Power light 14
filler panel for power supply bay 14
supplies 14
power cables
See power cord
Power Control button 8
power cord
available, list of 14
cable-restraint bracket 81
lengths 18
Power LED for hot-plug PCI slot 54
POWER SUPPLY 1 LED 156
POWER SUPPLY 2 LED 156
POWER SUPPLY 3 LED 156
POWER SUPPLY NON REDUNDANT LED
power supply, hot-swap
installing 79
removing 81
power-cord strain-relief bracket
power-on
hot-swap drives 68
light 10
Power control button 8
power-on password
bypassing 24, 103
changing 24
deleting 25
features 23
forgotten 24, 103
on boot 24
setting or changing 24
power-on self-test (POST)
battery failure 113
beep codes 109, 122
during configuration 19
enhanced 27
error messages 112
event/error logs 29
forgotten power-on password 24
message table 113
overview 109
quick mode 27
table, message 113
precautions
electrical safety vi
preface ix
preinstallation
steps 70
video controller 53
preinstalled devices 67, 68
preparing
for installation 41
for setup 41
internal drives for installation 70
to install
external options 90, 91
options 46
to remove internal drives 76
156
Index
203
printer
port 12
problems 147
SCSI 69
privileged-access password
See administrator password
problems, solving
configuration conflicts 151
diagnostic programs 107
diagnostic tools 107
error messages 109, 125
Ethernet controller 149
expansion enclosure 148
keyboard 145
memory 146
microprocessor 145
mouse 145
network adapter 61
network connection 148
option 146
overview 107
parallel port 146
pointing device 145
POST (power-on self-test) 109
POST beep codes 109, 122
POST messages 112
printer 147
running diagnostic programs 111
serial bus, universal 147
serial port 147
software 148
starting diagnostic programs 111
tests 107
troubleshooting charts 110, 143
USB 147
processing date data 190
processor
See microprocessor
Processor 1 Activity light 10
Processor 2 Activity light 10
processor board
DIMM connectors 66
jumper blocks 101
jumpers 102
layout 101
switches 102
processor board data 22
processor housing
product
advantages 1, 68
notices 188
product data 22
programs
advanced diagnostic 34
diagnostic 110
low-level format 34
204
IBM xSeries User's Reference
protecting
data 25
the server 41
publications
publications, ordering
169
R
rack
connectors 11
power supplies 13
rack model
rack installation procedure
RAID adapter
installation considerations 61, 69
installing hard disk drive 75
reconfiguring disk arrays 75
RAS 6
read-only memory (ROM)
See ROM (read-only memory)
rear view 11
reconfiguring the server after replacing the battery
reconfiguring your server 90
reducing glare 17
redundant Ethernet 35
refresh rate 144
registering your server 1
reliability 6
remote technical support 165
removable media
bays 68
drives 68, 71
removing
administrator password 26
battery 158
cover
left-side (tower model) 48
top (rack model) 49
cover (rack model) 49
door 50
hard disk drives 76
power supply 81
power-on password 24, 25, 103
server cables 47
server door 50
trim bezel 51
trim bezels 51
wrong disk drive, consequences of 76
replacement batteries, ordering 157
replacing
battery 157
hot-swap fan assembly 83
hot-swap power supply 81
requirements for terminating SCSI devices 70
Reset button 8
159
resources, allocating 28
restore settings 29
restoring configuration settings 29
RJ-45 connector 97
ROM (read-only memory)
address conflicts 151
RS-485
See Advanced System Management Interconnect
S
safety requirements
Australian electronic emission Class A notice 192
battery handling vii, 157
electrical vi, 42
electronic emission Class A notice 191, 192
FCC Class A notice 191
handling static-sensitive devices 44
laser compliance statement viii
save settings 29
scanners, SCSI 69
SCO UNIX messages 141
screen
blank 144
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu 21
flicker 144
SCSI disk utilities 33
screen filter 18
SCSI (small computer system interface)
cable requirements 69, 90
connector 12, 96
controller
See ServeRAID controller
description 69
devices 67, 69, 90
disk utilities 33
drives
external 90
location 68
low-level disk format 34
maximum SCSI cable lengths 90
port 96
purpose 69
SCSI IDs
assignments 90
description 69
for devices 69
purpose 69
viewing 33
SCSI cable for non-hot-swap bays 69
SCSI Hard Drive Activity light 10
SCSISelect Utility program
low-level disk format 34
menu description
SCSI Disk Utilities 33
starting 32
SCSISelect Utility program (continued)
using 32
security procedures
See also password
defining system owner's name 26
power-on password 24
self-tests, internal 109
sequence for installing adapters 30
serial number
serial port
assignment 22
bus, universal 147
connector 92
location 12
location (USB 2) 12
pin assignments 92
problems 147
Universal Serial Bus 23
server
adding drives 68
adding memory 65
advantages 68
consequences of removing wrong disk drive 76
controls 7
cover
installing, rack model 88
installing, tower model 85
disk arrays 75
door
installing 87
removing 50
unlocking 47
external options 90
features 2
features and specifications 2
illustrated views
front 67
rear 11
installing drives 67, 71, 73
internal options 53
PCI adapter expansion slots 53
preparing, for installation of options 46
problems 110
removing drives 76
replacing drives 76
security features
security, passwords 23, 26
specifications, server 3
startup options 27
ServeRAID controller
ServerGuide CDs 5
service processor
See Advanced System Management Processor
SERVICE PROCESSOR BUS LED 156
Service Processor Manager
See ?
Index
205
service summary 162
service, warranty
See telephone numbers, IBM
serviceability 6
services, fee 166
setting
administrator password 26
Advanced System Management Processor time
jumpers 103
passwords 23, 25
power-on password 24
SCSI IDs 90
switches and jumpers 70
Setup program
See Configuration/Setup Utility program
side-cover release lever 8
size of server 3
sizes
internal drives 68
memory 65
slots, expansion 11, 12
SMI LED 156
software
error 110, 148
problems 148
solving problems 163
configuration conflicts 151
diagnostic programs 107
diagnostic tools 107
error messages 109, 125
Ethernet controller 149
expansion enclosure 148
keyboard 145
memory 146
microprocessor 145
mouse 145
network adapter 61
network connection 148
option 146
overview 107
parallel port 146
pointing device 145
POST (power-on self-test) 109
POST beep codes 109, 122
POST messages 112
printer 147
running diagnostic programs 111
serial bus, universal 147
serial port 147
software 148
starting diagnostic programs 111
tests 107
troubleshooting charts 110, 143
USB 147
sound, acoustical noise output 3
206
IBM xSeries User's Reference
23
specification and features 2
specifications, server 3
speed
Ethernet controller 35
keyboard 27
memory 65
Start Options
enhanced POST 27
keyboard speed 27
number lock 27
startup sequence 27
starting
Configuration/Setup Utility program 20
diagnostic programs 111
SCSISelect Utility Program 32
startup
drive 27
microprocessor 145
password 24
sequence 27
static-sensitive devices, handling 44
status
indicators
See lights
lights
See lights
storage
See memory-module kits
storage devices 67
summary of features 2
super video graphics array (SVGA) controller
supervisor password
See administrator password
supplies, power 14
support line services, ordering 168
SVGA video controller 2, 53, 94
switches
on processor board 102
Power Control 8
Reset 8
Symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) 62
symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) disk-array
technologies, 4
system board
adapters 53
battery failure 113
jumper locations 100
layout 99
system card data 22
System Error LED 154, 155, 156, 157
System Error light 10
system error log 110
system information 22
system owner's name 26
System POST Complete light 10
151
System Power light 10
system resources 28
System Security menu
administrator password 25
power-on password 24
system owner's name 26
system service processor 29
System Summary 22
systems management port 92
two-pin jumper blocks
types of media 68
U
T
tape drive 68, 69
technical directory, publications
See telephone numbers, IBM
technical support, fee 166
technical support, remote 165
technical support, warranty 165
telephone assistance 165
telephone line requirements for the United Kingdom
telephone numbers, IBM
ordering batteries 157
TEMPERATURE LED 157
temperature of server environment 3
termination 70
terminator card 64
test log, viewing 112
testing
error messages 109
monitor 143
overview 107
POST (power-on self-test) 109
POST beep codes 109
programs 107
running 111
starting 111
three-pin jumper blocks 105
time, setting 23
tools 41
tower model
connectors 11
controls 7, 11
power supplies 13
trademarks 190
transmit and receive data 92
trim bezels
installing 86, 89
removing 51
troubleshooting tips
CD-ROM drive problems 143
charts 143
Ethernet controller 148, 149
overview 110
turning on the server, problems 145
two-drop SCSI cable 69
104
vii
unattended start mode
and power-on password 23
and system startup 25
definition 23
unattended startup with password 25
United Kingdom electronic emission Class A
notice 192
United Kingdom safety information vii
United Kingdom telephone line requirements vii
United States electronic emission Class A notice 191
United States FCC Class A notice 191
United States safety information vii
universal serial bus (USB)
See USB (universal serial bus)
unknown power-on password
bypassing 24, 103
changing 24
removing 25
unlocking the server door 47
updating device records 90
updating server configuration 30
upgrading the microprocessor 62
USB (universal serial bus)
configuration 23
connectors 23, 98
problems 147
utility programs
configuration 19
Configuration/Setup Utility program 20
diagnostic programs 110
SCSI disk 33
SCSISelect 32
V
venting of hot air 18
video
See also monitor
adapter requirements 53
connector 12, 94
connector location 99
controller 53
disabling controller 28
port 94
ROM address conflicts 151
SVGA 53
view
diagnostic log 112
front 67
rear 11
SCSI controller settings 32
Index
207
view (continued)
SCSI IDs 33
test log 112
viewing the diagnostic log 112
viewing the test log 112
virus checking 27
voltage regulator module 64
VRM 64
VRM LED 154
W
warranty extensions and upgrades 168
warranty service 165
weight of server 3
work area, arranging 17
World Wide Web 41
registering your server 1
server product information 1
World Wide Web home page 161, 163
wrap connector 111
write-back, microprocessor cache 28
write-through, microprocessor cache 28
Y
year 2000 readiness and instructions
208
IBM xSeries User's Reference
190
IBM
Part Number: 21P9014
Printed in the United States of America.
21P914
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement